Menu

Hebrews 9:14 — Word Study

Depth

N1904πόσῳ μᾶλλον τὸ αἷμα τοῦ Χριστοῦ, ὃς διὰ πνεύματος αἰωνίου ἑαυτὸν προσήνεγκεν ἄμωμον τῷ θεῷ, καθαριεῖ τὴν συνείδησιν ἡμῶν ἀπὸ νεκρῶν ἔργων εἰς τὸ λατρεύειν θεῷ ζῶντι;¶

BSAhow muchposos moremallon [to a greater degree] theho bloodahima [the atoning sacrifice] <the>ho of Christ,Christos [the Anointed One] whohos, hē throughdia [the] Spiritpneuma [the divine breath] eternalaiōnios [age-lasting] Himselfheautou [as a willing sacrifice] offeredprospherō unblemishedamōmos [without fault, blameless] <the>ho to God,theos [the supreme Deity] will purifykatharizō [cleanse, make pure] theho consciencesuneidēsis [moral awareness] of ussu fromapo deadnekros [spiritual lifelessness] worksergon [deeds, actions] in ordereis <the>ho to servelatreuō [minister, worship] Godtheos [the one true God] [the] living?zaō [eternally existing]

Word
Listen & take awayHebrews 9
English ↓ Download MP3 The Berean Standard Bible chapter audio already hosted for the site's Bible section — verse 14 is in this chapter.
Say the word Each Greek word carries its transliteration (zaō) — no per-word recordings of the Greek exist to link to.
Take it away
Hebrews 9:14quick helps
In a sentenceThe blood of Christ, offered through the eternal Spirit, purifies our consciences for service to the living God.
Who is speakingThe writer of Hebrews, discussing Christ's redemptive work.
Where we areThis verse is part of a larger argument about the superiority of Christ's sacrifice compared to the old covenant.
The hard wordἄμωμος
Take awayChrist's sacrifice is perfect and sufficient for our moral cleansing.
8 commentators on this verse Gill, Jamieson, Poole, Trapp & more — read them › clause subject verbπροσφέρω The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
How rare are these words?in the New Testament

Every word here is used elsewhere in the New Testament.

Bars are logarithmic — , the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.

Deep Study — Hebrews 9:14

Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.

Context — The Superiority of Christ's Sacrificegenerated

13For if the blood of goats and bulls and the ashes of a heifer sprinkled on those who are ceremonially unclean sanctify them so that their bodies are clean,
14how much more will the blood of Christ, who through the eternal Spirit offered Himself unblemished to God, purify our consciences from works of death, so that we may serve the living God!
15Therefore Christ is the mediator of a new covenant, so that those who are called may receive the promised eternal inheritance, now that He has died to redeem them from the transgressions committed under the first covenant.
16In the case of a will, it is necessary to establish the death of the one who made it,

Hebrews 9:14 contrasts the sacrificial system of the Old Testament with the ultimate sacrifice of Christ. The writer emphasizes that the blood of Christ, offered without blemish through the eternal Spirit, has the power to purify our consciences from dead works, enabling us to serve the living God. This purification is essential for believers, as it prepares them for a life of worship and service, reflecting the transformative power of Christ's atoning work.


Cross References

ReferenceText (BSB)
1Deuteronomy 31:27For I know how rebellious and stiff-necked you are. If you are already rebelling against the LORD while I am still alive, how much more will you rebel after my death!
22 Samuel 4:11How much more, when wicked men kill a righteous man in his own house and on his own bed, shall I not now require his blood from your hands and remove you from the earth!”
3Job 15:16how much less man, who is vile and corrupt, who drinks injustice like water?
4Matthew 7:11So if you who are evil know how to give good gifts to your children, how much more will your Father in heaven give good things to those who ask Him!
5Luke 12:24–28Consider the ravens: They do not sow or reap, they have no storehouse or barn; yet God feeds them. How much more valuable you are than the birds!

The Key Word ἄμωμος, amōmosgenerated

The term ἄμωμος (i.e., *amōmos*) means 'unblemished' or 'blameless.' It is often used in sacrificial contexts to denote animals that are without defect, which is significant in the New Testament as it describes Christ's sinless nature.

In this verse, it highlights the perfection of Christ's sacrifice, emphasizing that He offered Himself without fault to God. This adjective underscores the theological significance of Christ as the perfect atoning sacrifice, fulfilling the requirements of the law.


How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

In the Berean Standard Bible, the verse uses unblemished to describe Christ's offering, which is echoed in the KJV and ASV. The translations consistently convey the idea of Christ's perfection in sacrifice.

However, some versions differ in their choice of words. The YLT uses without spot, while the BBE opts for being without sin. These variations reflect different emphases on the nature of Christ's sacrifice.


Sentence Structuregenerated

The main verb in this verse is καθαριεῖ, will purify, which governs the entire sentence. The subject is the blood of Christ, with several phrases elaborating on the nature of this sacrifice and its effects.

The structure includes a noun phrase describing the subject, a participial phrase detailing Christ's offering, and a prepositional phrase indicating the purpose of the purification, all of which combine to present a comprehensive view of the redemptive work of Christ.


Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

ἄμωμος is used in the Septuagint to describe sacrificial animals that are without blemish, which is a critical requirement in the Old Testament sacrificial system. This term emphasizes the necessity of purity in offerings made to God.

The connection to the Hebrew term תָּמִים (tamim), meaning 'complete' or 'sound,' reinforces the idea that Christ fulfills the requirement of being an unblemished sacrifice.


In plain words — the whole versegenerated

Hebrews 9:14 explains that the blood of Christ, offered through the eternal Spirit, purifies our consciences from dead works. This allows us to serve the living God. The verse highlights the significance of Christ's perfect sacrifice in contrast to the old sacrificial system.


Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

What does it mean that Christ's blood purifies our consciences?

It means that through His sacrifice, believers are cleansed from guilt and moral defilement, enabling them to serve God with a clear conscience.

Why is it important that Christ was unblemished?

Christ being unblemished signifies His sinlessness and perfection, making Him the perfect sacrifice for our sins, fulfilling the requirements of the law.

What are 'dead works'?

Dead works refer to actions that are spiritually lifeless and unproductive, often associated with sin and disobedience to God.

How does this verse relate to the concept of serving God?

The purification of our consciences allows us to serve the living God, indicating that our service is rooted in the transformative power of Christ's sacrifice.


Reflection Questionsgenerated

  1. In what ways have I experienced the cleansing power of Christ in my own life?
  2. How can I ensure that my service to God is motivated by a pure conscience?
  3. What does it mean to me that Christ's sacrifice was unblemished?
  4. How can I help others understand the significance of Christ's blood in their lives?

The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it

The early church Fathers referenced this verse to discuss the significance of Christ's sacrifice and the nature of service to God. Their insights help illuminate the theological implications of the text.

Clement of AlexandriaThe Stromata Book 3 c. 150–215
As for ourselves, we set high value on continence which arises from love to the Lord and seeks that which is good for its own sake, sanctifying the temple of the Spirit.
Early Church Fathers on Hebrews 9 →
TertullianAgainst Marcion Book IV c. 155–220
Well, I on my side will first explain the reason of his offence, that I may the more easily explode the scandal of our heretic.
Early Church Fathers on Hebrews 9 →
Thomas Aquinas 1225–1274
435. - Having shown the signification of things pertaining to the Old Testament and the first tabernacle, the Apostle now describes the condition of things pertaining to the second tabernacle, which represented the New Testament.
Early Church Fathers on Hebrews 9 →

Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse

Each of these wrote on Hebrews 9:14 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.

John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire Bible

How much more shall the blood of Christ,.... Which is not the blood of a mere man, but the blood of the Son of God; and the argument is from the lesser to the greater; that if the ashes of the burnt

Read John Gill on Hebrews 9 →
Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's Commentary

How much more shall the blood of Christ, who through the eternal Spirit offered himself without spot to God, purge your conscience from dead works to serve the living God? Offered himself.

Read Robert Jamieson on Hebrews 9 →
Matthew Poole1624–1679Matthew Poole's Commentary on the Holy Bible

How much more shall the blood of Christ? The question supposeth an unexpressible difference between Christ’ s purifying and the legal sacrifices. The blood with which he pierced within the veil to the throne in the highest heavens, on which sat the just God, the proper, precious, powerful blood of God the Son incarnate. Who through the eternal Spirit; who in his immortal soul obeying all God’ s will in suffering, did, through his own eternal God-head, to which both body and soul were united, and which sanctified the body offered, as the altar the sacrifice, , which is called the spirit of holiness, , and gave value and virtue to the sacrifice, offered up his body a sacrifice for sin, when…

Read Matthew Poole on Hebrews 9 →
John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments

14 How much more shall the blood of Christ, who through the eternal Spirit offered himself without spot to God, purge your conscience from dead works to serve the living God? Ver. 14. By the eternal Spirit] That is, by his Deity, called the Spirit of holiness, Romans 1:4, and the Spirit, 1 Timothy 3:16, that gave both value and virtue to his death, both to satisfy and to sanctify. Purge your conscience] This is that eternal redemption, Hebrews 9:12. From dead works] The most specious performances of unregenerate persons are but dead works, because they proceed not from a principle of life, and have death for their wages, Romans 6:23. A will written with a dead man’ s hand can hold no law.…

Read John Trapp on Hebrews 9 →
Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers

(14) Through the eternal Spirit.—Better, through an eternal Spirit; for in a passage of so much difficulty it is important to preserve the exact rendering of the Greek, and the arguments usually adduced seem insufficient to justify the ordinary translation. By most readers of the Authorised version, probably, these words are understood as referring to the Holy Spirit, whose influence continually rested on “the Anointed One of God” (Acts 10:38). For this opinion there seems to be no foundation in the usage of the New Testament, and it is not indicated by anything in the context. The explanation of the words must rather be sought in the nature of our Lord, or in some attribute of that nature.…

Read Charles John Ellicott on Hebrews 9 →
AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the Bible

Verse 14. Who through the eternal Spirit] This expression is understood two ways: 1. Of the Holy Ghost himself. As Christ's miraculous conception was by the Holy Spirit, and he wrought all his miracles by the Spirit of God, so his death or final offering was made through or by the eternal Spirit; and by that Spirit he was raised from the dead, 1 Peter 3:18. Indeed, through the whole of his life be was justified by the Spirit; and we find that in this great work of human redemption, the Father, the Son, and the Holy Spirit were continually employed: therefore the words may be understood of the Holy Spirit properly. 2. Of the eternal Logos or Deity which dwelt in the man Christ Jesus, through…

Read AdamClarke on Hebrews 9 →
CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges

14. how much more] Again we have the characteristic word—the key-note as it were—of the Epistle.the blood of Christ] which is typified by “the fountain opened for sin and for uncleanness” (Zechariah 13:1).who through the eternal Spirit] If this be the right rendering the reference must be to the fact that Christ was “quickened by the Spirit” (1 Peter 3:18); that “God gave not the Spirit by measure unto Him” (John 3:34); that “the Spirit of the Lord was upon Him” (Luke 4:18); that He “by the Spirit of God” cast out devils (Matthew 12:28). For this view of the meaning see Pearson on the Creed, Art. iii., and it is represented by the reading “Holy” for Eternal in some cursive mss. and some…

Read Cambridge on Hebrews 9 →
Albert Barnes1798–1870Barnes' Notes on the Bible

How much more shall the blood of Christ - As being infinitely more precious than the blood of an animal could possibly be.

Read Albert Barnes on Hebrews 9 →

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.

Modern formal

BSBBerean Standard Bible2020

how much more will the blood of Christ, who through the eternal Spirit offered Himself unblemished to God, purify our consciences from works of death, so that we may serve the living God!

WEBWorld English Bible2000

how much more will the blood of Christ, who through the eternal Spirit offered himself without defect to God, cleanse your conscience from dead works to serve the living God?

MSBMajority Standard Bible2022

how much more will the blood of Christ, who through the eternal Spirit offered Himself unblemished to God, purify your consciences from works of death, so that we may serve the living God!

NETBNew English Translation2006

how much more will the blood of Christ, who through the eternal Spirit offered himself without blemish to God, purify our consciences from dead works to worship the living God.

Tyndale line

KJVKing James Version1611

How much more shall the blood of Christ, who through the eternal Spirit offered himself without spot to God, purge your conscience from dead works to serve the living God?

ASVAmerican Standard Version1901

how much more shall the blood of Christ, who through the eternal Spirit offered himself without blemish unto God, cleanse your conscience from dead works to serve the living God?

RVARevised Version, American1894

how much more shall the blood of Christ, who through the eternal Spirit offered himself without blemish unto God, cleanse your conscience from dead works to serve the living God?

NWBWebster's Bible1833

How much more shall the blood of Christ, who through the eternal Spirit offered himself without spot to God, cleanse your conscience from dead works to serve the living God?

GNVGeneva Bible1599

How much more shall the blood of Christ which through the eternall Spirit offered himselfe without fault to God, purge your conscience from dead workes, to serue the liuing God?

Strictly literal

DBYDarby Translation1890

how much rather shall the blood of the Christ, who by the eternal Spirit offered himself spotless to God, purify your conscience from dead works to worship [the] living God?

YLTYoung's Literal Translation1862

how much more shall the blood of the Christ (who through the age-during Spirit did offer himself unblemished to God) purify your conscience from dead works to serve the living God?

LSVLiteral Standard Version2020

how much more will the blood of the Christ (who through the perpetual Spirit offered Himself unblemished to God) purify your conscience from dead works to serve the living God?

ULBUnlocked Literal Bible2017

how much more will the blood of Christ, who through the eternal Spirit offered himself without blemish to God, cleanse our conscience from dead works to serve the living God?

From the Latin

DRADouay-Rheims (Challoner)1899

How much more shall the blood of Christ, who by the Holy Ghost offered himself unspotted unto God, cleanse our conscience from dead works, to serve the living God?

Simplified

FBVFree Bible Version2020

how much more does the blood of Christ—who offered himself in his sinless life to God through the eternal Spirit—clean your consciences from your past sinful lives so you can serve the living God?

BBEBible in Basic English1949

How much more will the blood of Christ, who, being without sin, made an offering of himself to God through the Holy Spirit, make your hearts clean from dead works to be servants of the living God?

Word by word, the decisions they made

μᾶλλονmallon more G3123 2 different renderings
moreASV BBE BSB DRA FBV GNV KJV LSV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
ratherDBY
προσήνεγκενprospherō offered G4374 3 different renderings
offeredASV BSB DBY DRA FBV GNV KJV LSV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB
offerYLT
offeringBBE
ἄμωμονamōmos unblemished G299 3 different renderings
without blemishASV NETB RVA ULB
unblemishedBSB LSV MSB YLT
without faultGNV
συνείδησινsuneidēsis conscience G4893 2 different renderings
conscienceASV DBY DRA GNV KJV LSV NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
consciencesBSB FBV MSB NETB
λατρεύεινlatreuō to serve G3000 4 different renderings
to serveASV DRA KJV LSV NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
worshipDBY NETB
we may serveBSB MSB
serveFBV

Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.


The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.

clauseγὰρforclauseεἰIfclausenoun phrase · subjectnoun phraseτὸthenoun phraseαἷμαbloodnoun phraseτράγωνof goatsκαὶandταύρωνof bullsκαὶandnoun phraseσποδὸς[the] ashesδαμάλεωςof a heiferclause · adverbialverbῥαντίζουσαsprinklingnoun phrase · objectτοὺςtheclauseverbκεκοινωμένουςhaving been defiledverbἁγιάζειsanctify [them]prepositional phrase · adverbialπρὸςfornoun phraseτὴνthenoun phrasenoun phraseτῆςof theσαρκὸςfleshκαθαρότηταpurificationclauseadverb phrase · adverbialπόσῳhow muchμᾶλλονmorenoun phrase · subjectτὸthenoun phraseαἷμαbloodnoun phrasenoun phraseτοῦ-Χριστοῦof Christclausesubjectὃςwhoprepositional phrase · adverbialδιὰthroughnoun phraseΠνεύματος[the] SpiritαἰωνίουeternalobjectἑαυτὸνHimselfverbπροσήνεγκενofferedsecond objectἄμωμονunblemishednoun phrase · indirect objectτῷ-Θεῷto Godverbκαθαριεῖwill purifynoun phrase · objectτὴνthenoun phraseσυνείδησινconscienceἡμῶνof usprepositional phrase · adverbialἀπὸfromnoun phraseνεκρῶνdeadἔργωνworksprepositional phrase · adverbialεἰςin ordernoun phraseτὸ-clauseverbλατρεύεινto servenoun phrase · objectΘεῷGodζῶντι[the] living

Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.


The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.

Latin VulgateAD 382–405

quanto magis sanguis Christi, qui per Spiritum Sanctum semetipsum obtulit immaculatum Deo, emundabit conscientiam nostram ab operibus mortuis, ad serviendum Deo viventi ?

Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.

Syriac Peshittaby AD 400

ܟܡܐ ܗܟܝܠ ܝܬܝܪܐܝܬ ܕܡܗ ܕܡܫܝܚܐ ܕܒܪܘܚܐ ܕܠܥܠܡ ܢܦܫܗ ܩܪܒ ܕܠܐ ܡܘܡ ܠܐܠܗܐ ܢܕܟܐ ܬܐܪܬܢ ܡܢ ܥܒܕܐ ܡܝܬܐ ܕܢܫܡܫ ܠܐܠܗܐ ܚܝܐ

The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.

Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.


The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.

Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

πόσῳ μᾶλλον τὸ αἷμα τοῦ Χριστοῦ, ὃς διὰ πνεύματος αἰωνίου ἑαυτὸν προσήνεγκεν ἄμωμον τῷ θεῷ, καθαριεῖ τὴν συνείδησιν ἡμῶν ἀπὸ νεκρῶν ἔργων εἰς τὸ λατρεύειν θεῷ ζῶντι;¶

The standard critical text of the New Testament.

Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

πόσῳ μᾶλλον τὸ αἷμα τοῦ Χριστοῦ, ὃς διὰ πνεύματος αἰωνίου ἑαυτὸν προσήνεγκεν ἄμωμον τῷ θεῷ, καθαριεῖ τὴν συνείδησιν ἡμῶν ἀπὸ νεκρῶν ἔργων εἰς τὸ λατρεύειν θεῷ ζῶντι;¶

The previous edition, still widely cited.

SBL Greek New Testament2010 · Michael Holmes

πόσῳ μᾶλλον τὸ αἷμα τοῦ Χριστοῦ, ὃς διὰ πνεύματος αἰωνίου ἑαυτὸν προσήνεγκεν ἄμωμον τῷ θεῷ, καθαριεῖ τὴν συνείδησιν ἡμῶν ἀπὸ νεκρῶν ἔργων εἰς τὸ λατρεύειν θεῷ ζῶντι;¶

The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.

Westcott–Hort1881 · Westcott and Hort

πόσῳ μᾶλλον τὸ αἷμα τοῦ Χριστοῦ, ὃς διὰ πνεύματος αἰωνίου ἑαυτὸν προσήνεγκεν ἄμωμον τῷ θεῷ, καθαριεῖ τὴν συνείδησιν ἡμῶν ἀπὸ νεκρῶν ἔργων εἰς τὸ λατρεύειν θεῷ ζῶντι;¶

The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.

Tregelles1857–1879 · Samuel Prideaux Tregelles

πόσῳ μᾶλλον τὸ αἷμα τοῦ Χριστοῦ, ὃς διὰ πνεύματος αἰωνίου ἑαυτὸν προσήνεγκεν ἄμωμον τῷ θεῷ, καθαριεῖ τὴν συνείδησιν ἀπὸ νεκρῶν ἔργων εἰς τὸ λατρεύειν θεῷ ζῶντι;¶

An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.

Tyndale House Greek NT2017 · Tyndale House, Cambridge

πόσῳ μᾶλλον τὸ αἷμα τοῦ Χριστοῦ, ὃς διὰ πνεύματος αἰωνίου ἑαυτὸν προσήνεγκεν ἄμωμον τῷ θεῷ, καθαριεῖ τὴν συνείδησιν ἀπὸ νεκρῶν ἔργων εἰς τὸ λατρεύειν θεῷ ζῶντι;¶

A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.

Byzantine majority text2018 · Robinson–Pierpont

πόσῳ μᾶλλον τὸ αἷμα τοῦ Χριστοῦ, ὃς διὰ πνεύματος αἰωνίου ἑαυτὸν προσήνεγκεν ἄμωμον τῷ θεῷ, καθαριεῖ τὴν συνείδησιν ἀπὸ νεκρῶν ἔργων εἰς τὸ λατρεύειν θεῷ ζῶντι;¶

The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.

Textus Receptus1550/1894 lineage

πόσῳ μᾶλλον τὸ αἷμα τοῦ Χριστοῦ, ὃς διὰ πνεύματος αἰωνίου ἑαυτὸν προσήνεγκεν ἄμωμον τῷ θεῷ, καθαριεῖ τὴν συνείδησιν ἀπὸ νεκρῶν ἔργων εἰς τὸ λατρεύειν θεῷ ζῶντι;¶

The printed tradition behind the King James Version.

Every witness on this verse they differ
Critical editions
Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993SBL Greek New Testament2010Westcott–Hort1881Tregelles1857–1879Tyndale House Greek NT2017
Byzantine / Majority
Byzantine majority text2018
Received Text
Textus Receptus1550/1894

A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.

Word by word, across the editions

WordEditions carrying itMissing from
ἡμῶν of usNA28, NA27, SBL, WHTreg, Tyn, TR, Byz

The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.

Hebrews 9:14πόσοςhow muchhow muchπόσοςμᾶλλονmoremoreμᾶλλονthetheαἷμαbloodbloodαἷμα<the><the>Χριστόςof Christ,of Christ,Χριστόςὅςwhowhoὅςδιάthroughthroughδιάπνεῦμα[the] Spiri[the] SpiritπνεῦμααἰώνιοςeternaleternalαἰώνιοςἑαυτοῦHimselfHimselfἑαυτοῦπροσφέρωofferedofferedπροσφέρωἄμωμοςunblemishedunblemishedἄμωμος<the><the>θεόςto God,to God,θεόςκαθαρίζωwill purifywill purifyκαθαρίζωthetheσυνείδησιςconscienceconscienceσυνείδησιςυμωνof usof usυμωνἀπόfromfromἀπόνεκρόςdeaddeadνεκρόςἔργονworksworksἔργονεἰςin orderin orderεἰς<the><the>λατρεύωto serveto serveλατρεύωθεόςGodGodθεόςζάω[the] livin[the] living?ζάωArticle thArticle theκαθαρόςAdj clean,Adj clean, pureκαθαρόςχρίωv. I anoinv. I anointχρίωπνέωv. I blowv. I blowπνέωαἰώνn.m. an agn.m. an age, a αἰώνπρόςPrep. to, Prep. to, towarπρόςἄλφαletter theletter the firsἄλφαὅςRel.pr. whRel.pr. who, whὅςμάλισταSup.adv. mSup.adv. most oμάλισταοὗAdv where,Adv where, whitοὗἅγιοςAdj set apAdj set apart, ἅγιοςεὐχαριστέωv. I thankv. I thank, givεὐχαριστέωβασιλείαn.f. kingsn.f. kingship, βασιλείαπεντακισχίλιοιAdj five tAdj five thousaπεντακισχίλιοικόφινοςn.m. a larn.m. a large baκόφινοςπόσοςCorr./Irg.Corr./Irg.pr. hπόσοςπερισσεύωv. I exceev. I exceed, amπερισσεύωδιαθήκηn.f. a covn.f. a covenantδιαθήκη
meets it a little oftener than chancemeets it far oftener than chancebuilt from the same roottwo words of the verse share ita word of this versea related word

Lexicons — every word in Hebrews 9:14

One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.

Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.

how much more the blood <the> of Christ, who through [the] Spirit eternal Himself offered unblemished <the> to God, will purify the conscience of us from dead works in order <the> to serve God [the] living?
πόσῳposos how much G4214 Correlative or interrogative pronoun · dative · singular · neuter
27× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Hebrews than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word asks about the amount or quantity of something, like in Matthew 6:23 and Mark 9:21. It seeks to know how much, how great, or how many of something exists.
Tyndale gloss
how much/many?
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word πόσος (posos) is an interrogative adjective meaning 'how much,' 'how great,' or 'how many.' It can refer to quantity, magnitude, distance, time, or value, and appears in various contexts in the New Testament, such as in Matthew and Hebrews. The lexicons consistently describe its range of use without significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πόσος, -η, -ον,

adj. of number, magnitude, degree, etc.,

how much, how great, how many: Mt 6:23, II Co 7:11; of time, Mk 9:21; neut., absol., Lk 16:5, 7; dat., πόσῳ, adverbially, how much, Mt 12:12; id. seq. μᾶλλον, Mt 7:11 10:25, Lk 11:13 12:24, 28, Ro 11:12, 24, Phm 16, He 9:14; π. χείρονος τιμωρίας, He 10:29; pl., Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πόσος, -n, -ov, [(cf. Curtius § 631), fr. Aeschyl. down, Lat. quantus], how great: Mt. vi. 23; 2 Co. vii. 11; πόσος χρόνος, how great (a space) i. e. how long time, Mk. ix. 21; neut. how much, Lk. xvi. 5, 7; πόσῳ, (by) how much, Mt. xii. 12; πόσῳ μᾶλλον, Mt. vii.11; x. 25; Lk. xi. 13; xii. 24, 28; Ro. xi. 12, 24; Philem. 16; Heb. ix. 14; πόσῳ χείρονος τιμωρίας, Heb. x. 29; plur. how many: with nouns, Mt. xv. 34; xvi. 9sq.; Mk. vi. 38; viii. 4, 19 sq. ; Lk. xv. 17; Acts xxi. 20; πόσα, how grave, Mt. xxvii. 13; Mk. xv. 4.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πόσος, “how great?” plur. ‘‘how many?’’: cf. P Oxy IV. 7424 (B.C. 2) ἀπόστειλόν plo]t πόσας δέσμας παρείληφες, “‘send me word how many bundles you have received,” P Fay 1221 (c. a.D. 100) δήλωσόν μοι πόσαι ἐξέβησαν, ‘(inform me how many (artabae) came out,” P Tebt II. 41718 (iii/a.D.) εἴδε πόσα μέτρα [ἔχι, ‘see how many measures there are,” and the late P Amh II. 153%? (vi/vii A.D.) γράψον pot εὐθέως ὅτι π[όϊσα (sc. πρόβατα) ἀρρενικά ἐστιν καὶ πόσα θηλικά, ““νυεῖξε me at once how many males there are, and how many females.’’ For πόσου, “αἱ what price,” cf. PSI V. 508° (B.C. 256-5) πόσου ἕκαστόν ἐστιν, and P Oxy XII. 14918 (early iv/A.D.) ἀξιῶ σε μαθεῖν πόσου ἡμῖν συναλλάσσει κριθήν, “1 beg you to find out at what price he is contracting to get barley for me.” See also Kaibel 110° (ii/A.D.) ζω]ῆς δ᾽ ἐς πόσον ἦλίθες ; For the subst. ποσότης we may quote P Oxy X. 1293° (A.D. 117-38) περὶ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πόσος (posos) — how much/many?.

πόσος,

Ionic dialect κόσος, η, ον, interrogative adjective of what quantity?

1. of Number, how many? κόσοι τινές εἰσι οἱ Αακεδαιμόνιοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with singular Nouns, how great? how much? π. πλῆθος νεῶ; [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. of Distance, how far? πόσον ἄπεστιν ἐνθένδε τὸ στράτευμ; [Refs]; π. τις ὁδὸς εἴη[Refs 5th c.BC+]

3. of Time, how long? π. τινὰ χρόνο; [Refs 5th c.BC+]

4. of Value, how much? πόσον δίδω; [Refs]at what price? [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐπὶ πόσ;[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐκ πόσου is falsa lectio for{ὁπόσου} in [Refs 4th c.BC+]

5. of Degree, how great? πόθο; πόσος τι; [Refs 5th c.BC+]: neuter adverb πόσο; πόσ; to what amount? [Refs 5th c.BC+]

8.

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

πόσος

posos

from an absolute pos (who, what) and 3739; interrogative pronoun (of

amount) how much (large, long or (plural) many):--how great (long,

many), what.

see GREEK for 3739

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πόσος, η, ον

Corr./Irg.pr.

how much, how great, how many

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πόσος posos 27x

How great? How much? Mt. 6:23; Lk. 16:5, 7; 2 Cor. 7:11; πόσῳ, adverbially before a comparative, How much? By how much? Mt. 7:11; 10:25; Heb. 10:29; of time, How long? Mk. 9:21; of number, pl. How many? Mt. 15:34; 16:9, 10

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πόσος πόσος;, ionic and aeolic κόσος, η, ον interrog. adj. corresponding to the relat. ὅσος and demonstr. τόσος, Lat. quantus? of what quantity? opp. to πηλίκος (which refers to bulk), often with τις added:

of Number, how many? Hdt., attic: with sg. Nouns, how great? how much? π. τι πλῆθος; Aesch.

of Distance, how far? Xen.

of Time, how long? Soph., etc.

of Value, how much? Ar.; πόσου; for how much? at what price? Lat. quanti? id. Ar.; so, ἐπὶ πόσῳ; Plat.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Q-DSN — Correlative or interrogative pronoun · dative · singular · neuter
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

Q-DSN Part of Speech: correlative or interrogative pronoun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
52%how much
how much52% · 14×how many33% · 9×how many things7% · 2×how great!4% · 1×how long4% · 1×

27 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial41%object37%subject11%second object7%predicate4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 27 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakἐρωτάωI ask, question,πατήρfather, Father,
σύ
τέκνονa child, descend
καίand, even, also, nam
πεντακισχίλιοιfive thousandτετρακισχίλιοιfour thousand
σκότοςdarkness
Article the
ἐπικαλέωI call by an additio
ΒεελζεβούλProp
πόσοςhow much27×
what comes after →
μᾶλλονmore, rather
Article theσύοὗτος
κόφινοςa large basket
λαμβάνωI receive, takeκλάσμαa fragment
σπυρίςa plaited basket
λαμβάνωI receive, takeπλήρωμαfullness, fulfil
σύ
καταμαρτυρέωI give evidence κατηγορέωI accuse, charge
ἔχωI have, hold, posses
ἄρτοςbread, a loaf, f

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπόσος · 27× in the New Testament
Matthew Luke Mark Hebrews Romans 2 Corinthians Acts Philemon
Across the New Testament8 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch The Didache
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 61c. AD 40

εἰς πόσα δ’ ἄλλα φαίην ἂν ἔγωγε τῶν ἡμῖν μὲν ἀδηλουμένων — οὐ γὰρ πάντα τῷ θνητῷ γένει γνώριμα —, πρὸς δὲ τὴν τοῦ ὅλου συνεργούντων διαμονήν, ἃ θεσμοῖς καὶ νόμοις, οὓς ὥρισεν ὁ θεὸς ἀκινήτους ἐν τῷ παντί, συμβαίνει πάντῃ τε καὶ πάντως ἐπιτελεῖσθαι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.6c. AD 75–95

ἤδη μὲν οὖν καὶ πρότερον διενοήθην, ὅτε τὸν πόλεμον συνέγραφον, δηλῶσαι τίνες ὄντες ἐξ ἀρχῆς Ἰουδαῖοι καὶ τίσι χρησάμενοι τύχαις ὑφʼ οἵῳ τε παιδευθέντες νομοθέτῃ τὰ πρὸς εὐσέβειαν καὶ τὴν ἄλλην ἄσκησιν ἀρετῆς πόσους τε πολέμους ἐν μακροῖς…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 19.8c. AD 100

κοινωνήσεις ἐν πᾶσιν τῷ πλησίον σου καὶ οὐκ ἐρεῖς ἴδια εἶναι: εἰ γὰρ ἐν τῷ ἀφθάρτῳ κοινωνοί ἐστε, πόσῳ μᾶλλον ἐν τοῖς φθαρτοῖς;

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 3rd c. AD 7th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Fay. 122Euhemeria (Arsinoites)AD 100

μέτρῳ δὲ τετραχοινίκωι τὸ σίναπι μέτρησον ελ … … ὑπογραφὴν αεφυτοσι, καὶ δήλωσόν μοι πόσαι ἐξέβησαν ἵνα εἰδῶ. ἔπεμψά σοι ὑποδείγματα μεγάλωνὑποδείγματα μεγάλων τεσσαράκοντα εἰς τὴν μηχανὴν τῆς Χαλώθεως.

P.Fam.Tebt. 19ArsinoitesAD 118

βαστάσωσι μετὰ τὴν σὴν κρίσιν. Κρονίων· δαπάνας ἐποιήσαμεν. Ἀπολωνίδης ὁ στρατηγός· ὁ κωμογραμματεὺς ἐπικρινεῖ πόσαι ἐγένοντο δαπάναι καὶ ταύτας ποιήσει ἀπολαβεῖν συγκομιζομένου τὰ θέρεια. ἀνέγνων

P.Flor. 2 170Theadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 252

νῦν οὖν διάπεμψαι ἵνα μὴ ὡς τοιούτῳ σοι χρησώμεθα εἰ περὶ τῶν οὐδαμίνων ἀμελεῖτε πόσῳ μᾶλλον τῶν ἀναγκαιοτέρων. β ἔτους Μεσορὴ θ. Ἡρωνείνῳ φροντιστῇ Θεαδελφείας

how much more the blood <the> of Christ, who through [the] Spirit eternal Himself offered unblemished <the> to God, will purify the conscience of us from dead works in order <the> to serve God [the] living?
μᾶλλονmallon more G3123 Adverb
81× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Hebrews than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for more or rather, used to show a greater degree of something, as seen in Mark 10:48 and Romans 5:15. It means a higher amount or extent. Used in comparisons to show increase.
Amplified meaning
to a greater degree
Tyndale gloss
more
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word μᾶλλον is an adverb meaning 'more' or 'rather,' derived from μάλα. It indicates an increase in degree or preference, often used in comparisons. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as Mark 10:48 and Philippians 1:23. Notably, it can also function as a periphrasis for comparatives.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

μάλα,

adv.,

[in LXX for אֲבָל, III Ki 1:43, Da LXX 10:21, al.; compar. for מ, Nu 13:32 (31), al.; μᾶλλον ἠ (מ), Ge 19:9, al.; superlat., II Mac 8:7, IV Mac 4:22 12:9 15:4;]

Pos., very, very much, exceedingly (cl.; LXX ut supr.; in NT its place is taken by λίαν, σφόδρα, etc.).

Compar., μᾶλλον.

Of increase, more; with qualifying words: πολλῷ, Mk 10:48, Lk 18:39, Ro 5:15, 17, Phl 2:12, al.; πόσῳ, Lk 12:24, Ro 11:12, al.; τοσούτῳ . . . ὅσῳ,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

μᾶλλον (compar. of μάλα, very, very much), [fr. Hom. down], adv., more, to a greater degree; rather; ab added to verbs and adjectives, it denotes increase, a greater quantity, a larger measure, a higher degree, more, more fully, (Germ. in héherem Grade, Maasse); ἃ. words defining the measure or size are joined to it in the ablative (dat.): πολλῷ much, by far, Mk. x. 48; Lk. xviii. 39; Ro. v. 15, 17, (in both these verses the underlying thought is, the measure of salvation for which we are indebted to Christ is far greater than that of the ruin which came from Adam; for the difference between the consequences traceable to Adam and to Christ is not only one of quality, but of quantity also; cf. Riickert, Com. on Rom. vol. i. 281 sq. [4]. (fr. Chrys. to Meyer and Godet) content themselves here with a logical increase, far more certainly]); 2 Co. 111. 9,11; Phil. ii. 12; πόσῳ how much, Lk.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

μᾶλλον. P Oxy II. 47457 (a.p. 184?) ἀβουλίᾳ μᾶλλον ἢ πειθοῖ τῶν παρηγγελμένων, ‘in defiance of rather than in obedience tions, p. 128) ὡς ἐν ἄλ]λοις πλείστοις νῦν ἔτι μᾶλλον (cf. Phil 15), ‘‘as on many other occasions so now still

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

μᾶλλον (mallon) — more.

Included with: μάλα [μᾰλᾰ;

but [Refs 8th c.BC+] sometimes uses the ultima long before λ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; before μ, [Refs] adverb very, exceedingly, prefixed or subjoined to Adjectives, Verbs, and Adverbs:

1. strengthening the word with which it stands,

1. a with adjectives, in [Refs 8th c.BC+] very many, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; μ. πᾶσα, μ. πάντα, every one, all together, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; μάλ᾽ ἀσκηθής all unhurt, [Refs]; ἀβληχρὸς μ. τοῖος quite gentle, [Refs]; σαρδάνιον μ. τοῖον a quite sardonic smile,[Refs]; ἐμέο πρότερος μ. actually before me, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; later, μ. φιλόσοφοι, πλάτανος μάλ᾽ ἀμφιλαφής, etc., [Refs 5th c.BC+] very old, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

μᾶλλον

mallon

neuter of the comparative of the same as 3122; (adverbially) more (in

a greater degree)) or rather:--+ better, X far, (the) more (and more),

(so) much (the more), rather.

see GREEK for 3122

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

μᾶλλον

Adv

more, rather

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

μᾶλλον mallon 81x

more, to a greater extent, in a higher degree, Mt. 18:13; 27:24; Jn. 5:18; 1 Cor. 14:18; rather, in preference, Mt. 10:6; Eph. 4:28; used in a periphrasis for the comparative, Acts 20:35; as an intensive with a comparative term, Mt. 6:26; Mk. 7:36; 2 Cor. 7:13; Phil. 1:23; μᾶλλον δέ, yea rather, or, more properly speaking, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

μᾶλλον comp. of μάλα; v. μάλα II.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adv — Adverb
adverb — it qualifies the verb, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

ADV ADVerb or adverb and particle combined

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
48%more
more48% · 40×rather41% · 34×other renderings11% · 9×

83 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 11 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 81 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
πολύςmuch, many, often
οὐNegδέbut, on the otheδόξαhonor, renown, g
πόσος
σύἐπικαλέωI call by an addαὐτός
δέbut, on the other ha
πορεύομαιI travel, journeφοβέωI fear, am terriδιέρχομαιI pass through,
αὐτός
ἐπίδιαστέλλωI give a commissεἰμίI am, exist
ἀλλάbut, except
ὠφελέωI help, benefit,ἀνήκωis due, becomingεἰμίI am, exist
μᾶλλονmore81×
what comes after →
Article the
πατήρfather, Father, οἰκιακόςone of a familyδύναμαιI am powerful, a
δέbut, on the other ha
ἵναin order that, sπροστίθημιI put to, add, dἐγείρωI wake, arouse,
Disj
Article theἐπίἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
σύ
ὀλιγόπιστοςof little faithδιαφέρωI carry through,χαρίζομαιI show favor to,
πρός
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceμᾶλλον · 81× in the New Testament
1 Corinthians Matthew 2 Corinthians Romans Acts Hebrews Philippians Luke Mark John Ephesians 1 Thessalonians
Across the New Testament17 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 18 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 7c. AD 40

Τινὲς γὰρ τὸν κόσμον μᾶλλον ἢ τὸν κοσμοποιὸν θαυμάσαντες τὸν μὲν ἀγένητόν τε καὶ ἀίδιον ἀπεφήναντο, τοῦ δὲ θεοῦ πολλὴν ἀπραξίαν ἀνάγνως κατεψεύσαντο, δέον ἔμπαλιν τοῦ μὲν τὰς δυνάμεις ὡς ποιητοῦ καὶ πατρὸς καταπλαγῆναι, τὸν δὲ μὴ πλέον ἀποσεμνῦναι…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.44c. AD 75–95

φύλλοις οὖν ἑαυτοὺς συκῆς ἐσκέπασαν καὶ ταῦτα πρὸ τῆς αἰδοῦς προβαλόμενοι μᾶλλον ἐδόκουν εὐδαιμονεῖν ὡς ὧν πρότερον ἐσπάνιζον εὑρόντες.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.3c. AD 100

διὸ καὶ μᾶλλον συγχαίρω ἐμαυτῷ ἐλπίζων σωθῆναι.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD 7th c. AD
P.Oxy. 74 5019OxyrhynchosAD 101–AD 125

εἰ οἶδας ὅτι συμφέρει μᾶλλον ἀγοράσαι παιδίσκην καὶ οὐ συμφέρει οὕτως χρήσασθαι, τοῦτό μοι δός.

P.Mil.Vogl. 1 24Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 117

τότε καὶ ἐπιλαθόμενοι οἷοι ἦσαν παρʼ ἐμοὶ τότε καὶ νῦν οἷοί εἰσιν, ἐπεμβαίνουσί μοι μᾶλλον, ὡς καὶ ὁ ἰσχαρὸς ἱέραξ τότε ἐποίησεν πάλιν σὺν αὐτῷ. ὡς νῦν οὖν Δημήτριος

P.Phil. 10Philadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 139

καὶ οὗτοι ἕνεκα τῆς χρείας ἀφῃρέθησαν ἀφʼ ἡμῶν καὶ εἰς Ἀλεξάνδρειαν ἐπορεύθησαν καὶ ἔτι μᾶλλον ὀλιγώτεροι ἐγενόμεθα, ἀναγκαίως ἐπὶ σὲ κατεφύγομεν καὶ ἀξιοῦμεν, ἐάν σοι δόξῃ ἐπιτρέψαι ἐαθῆναι ἡμᾶς

how much more the blood <the> of Christ, who through [the] Spirit eternal Himself offered unblemished <the> to God, will purify the conscience of us from dead works in order <the> to serve God [the] living?
τὸho the G3588 Article · nominative · singular · neuter
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Hebrews as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-NSN — Article · nominative · singular · neuter
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NSN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

how much more the blood <the> of Christ, who through [the] Spirit eternal Himself offered unblemished <the> to God, will purify the conscience of us from dead works in order <the> to serve God [the] living?
αἷμαahima blood G129 Noun · nominative · singular · neuter
97× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Hebrews than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Blood, literally or figuratively, as in Mark 5:25 and John 1:13. It can refer to the atoning blood of Christ or kindred and bloodshed.
Amplified meaning
the atoning sacrifice
Tyndale gloss
(Field of) Blood
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word αἷμα (i.e., *haima*) means 'blood' and encompasses various meanings, including literal blood of humans and animals, bloodshed, and metaphorical uses related to kinship and origin. It appears in numerous New Testament passages, notably in contexts of sacrifice and the blood of Christ. Some entries highlight its use in phrases indicating human nature contrasted with divine, while others note its association with color and bloodshed.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αἷμα, ατος, τό,

[in LXX for דָּם;]

blood.

In the ordinary sense: Mk 5:25, Lk 8:43, 44 22:44, Jo 19:34, Ac 15:20, 29 21:25, Re 8:7, 8 11:6 16:3, 4, 6 19:13.

In special senses:

of generation, origin, kinship (cl.): Jo 1:13 (v. MM, VGT, s.v.);

as in OT (AR on Eph, 6:12), in the phrase σάρξ καὶ αἷ. (αἷ. κ. σ.), to indicate human nature as opp. to God and created spirits: Mt 16:17, I Co 15:50, Ga 1:16, Eph 6:12,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αἷμα, -ros, τό, blood, whether of men or of animals; 1. a. simply and generally: Jn. xix. 34; Rev. viii. 7 56. ; xi. 6; xvi. 3 sq. 6” (on which passages cf. Ex. vii. 20 544.) ; xix. 13; ῥύσις αἵματος, Mk. v. 25, [(πηγὴ αἷμ. 29)]; Lk. viii. 43 sq.; θρόμβοι αἵματος, Lk. xxii. 44 [L br. WH reject the pass.]. So also in passages where the eating of blood (and of bloody flesh) is forbidden, Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; cf. Lev. iii. 17; vil. 16 (26); xvii. 10; see Knobel on Ley. vii. 26 sq.; [Kalisch on Lev., Preliminary Essay ὃ 1]; Riickert, Abendmahl, p. 94. ὍὌ. As it was anciently believed that the blood is the seat of the life (Lev. xvii. 11; [cf. Delitzsch, Bibl. Psychol. pp. 238-247 (Eng. trans. p. 281 sqq-)]), the phrase σὰρξ x. αἷμα (D7) 3, a common phrase in Rabbinical writers), or in inverse order αἷμα x. σάρξ, denotes man’s living body compounded of flesh and blood, 1 Co. xv. 50…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

αἷμα. An interesting parallel to the common Biblical phrase αἷμα ἐκχέω, especially as it appears in Deut 19’ καὶ οὐκ ἐκχυθήσεται αἷμα ἀναίτιον, is afforded by an inscription found on a tombstone at Rheneia, containing a Jewish ‘‘prayer for vengeance,” Sy// 816°* (i/A.D.) ἐγχέαντας αὐτῆς τὸ ἀναίτιον αἷμα ἀδίκως : see the full discussion in Deissmann 2.42 p. 4231. For the use of αἷμα, as in Jn 11", cf. P Lips I. 28! (a.p. 381) mp[d]s τὸ εἶναί cov vilo]y γνήσιον καὶ πρωτότοκον ὡς ἐξ ἰδίου αἵματος γεννηθέντα σοι. In P Leid C (verso) 119 (p. 118 —B.c. 161) two men appear in a dream saying Πτολεμαῖος, λαβὲ to[is] χαλκοὺς τοῦ αἵματος : they count out a purseful and say to one of the Twins εἰδοὺ τοὺς χαλκοὺς Tod αἵματος. Leemans quotes an opinion that this meant the price of a victim, and compares Mt 27% In the sense of murder or blood-guiltiness it finds modern support in the Pontic dialect…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αἷμα (ahima) — blood.

αἷμα, ατος, τό,

blood, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: in plural, streams of blood, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. of anything like blood, Βακχίου[LXX+5th c.BC+]

2. b dye obtained from ἄγχουσα, alkanet, [Refs]

3. with collateral meaning of spirit, courage, οὐκ ἔχων αἷμα pale, spiritless [Refs 4th c.BC+]

II. bloodshcd, murder, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὅμαιμον αἷ. a kinsman's murder, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; εἴργασται μητρῷον αἷ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αἶ. πράττειν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; αἷμα τραγοκτόνον shedding of goat's blood, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐφ᾽ αἵματι φεύγειν to avoid trial for murder by going into exile, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: plural in this sense, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αἵματασύγγονα brothers' corpses, [Refs 5th c.BC+] —concrete, νεακόνητον αἷ. keen-edged death, i. e. a sword, [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

αἷμα

haima

of uncertain derivation; blood, literally (of men or animals),

figuratively (the juice of grapes) or specially (the atoning blood of

Christ); by implication, bloodshed, also kindred:--blood.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αἷμα, ατος, τό

n.n.

blood

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αἱμα haima 97x

blood; of the color of blood; bloodshed; blood-guiltiness; natural descent

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αἷμα blood, Hom., etc.; in pl. streams of blood, Trag.

bloodshed, murder, Aesch., etc.: —ἐφ᾽ αἵματι φεύγειν to avoid trial for murder by going into exile, Dem.; so, αἷμα φεύγειν Eur.

like Lat. sanguis, blood-relationship, kin, Soph., Hom., etc.; ὁ πρὸς αἵματος one of the blood or race, Soph.; μητρὸς τῆς ἐμῆς ἐν αἵματι akin to her by blood, Aesch.

Deriv. uncertain.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NSN — Noun · nominative · singular · neuter
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

blud (dam, probably from 'adham "to be red"; haima): Used in the Old Testament to designate the life principle in either animal or vegetable, as the blood of man or the juice of the grape (Le 17:11, et al.); in the New Testament for the blood of an animal, the atoning blood of Christ, and in both Old Testament and New Testament in a figurative sense for bloodshed or murder (Ge 37:26; Ho 4:2; Re 16:6).

1. Primitive Ideas:

Although the real function of the blood in the human system was not fully known until the fact of its circulation was established by William Harvey in 1615, nevertheless from the earliest times a singular mystery has been attached to it by all peoples. Blood…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Blood

(1.) As food, prohibited in Gen. 9:4, where the use of animal food is first allowed. Comp. Deut. 12:23; Lev. 3:17; 7:26; 17:10-14. The injunction to abstain from blood is renewed in the decree of the council of Jerusalem (Acts 15:29). It has been held by some, and we think correctly, that this law of prohibition was only ceremonial and temporary; while others regard it as still binding on all. Blood was eaten by the Israelites after the battle of Gilboa (1 Sam. 14:32-34).

(2.) The blood of sacrifices was caught by the priest in a basin, and then sprinkled seven times on the altar; that of the passover on the…

Smith's Bible Dictionary

To blood is ascribed in Scripture the mysterious sacredness which belongs to life, and God reserved it to himself when allowing man the dominion over and the use of the lower animals for food. Thus reserved, it acquires a double power: (1) that of sacrificial atonement; and (2) that of becoming a curse when wantonly shed, unless duly expiated. (Genesis 9:4; Leviticus 7:26; 17:11-13)

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

The life of all animals was regarded as especially in the blood, which was a sacred and essential part of the sacrifices offered to God, Heb 9:22. It was solemnly sprinkled upon the altar and the mercy seat, "for it is the blood that maketh atonement for the soul," Le 17:1-16 the life of the victim for the life of the sinner. It was therefore most sacredly associated with the blood of the Lamb of God which "cleanseth us from all sin," Eph 1:7 1Jo 1:7. Hence the strict prohibition renewed in Ac 15:29. In direct opposition to this are the heathen customs of drinking the blood of animals and even of men- of eating raw flesh, with the blood, and even fresh cut from the living…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
98%blood
blood98% · 98×from blood2% · 2×

100 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial42%object21%subject19%predicate17%indirect object2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 97 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἐνκαίand, even, also,διά
καίand, even, also, nam
σάρξflesh, bodyεἰδωλόθυτοςsacrificed to anἸησοῦςJesus
ἐν
σχεδόνnearly, almostἐνιαυτόςa yearμέγας
ῥύσιςa flowing, an issue
ἐν
εἰς
σελήνηthe moonαὐτός
αἷμαblood97×
what comes after →
Article the
Χριστόςanointed, the Meδιαθήκηa covenant, willἀρνίονa lamb
καίand, even, also, nam
πνικτόςstrangledσάρξflesh, bodyArticle the
αὐτός
ἐπίκαίand, even, also,σῴζωI save, heal
ἐγώ
Article theἀληθήςunconcealed, truἐκ
ἸησοῦςJesus
Χριστόςanointed, the MeArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαἷμα · 97× in the New Testament
Hebrews Revelation Acts Matthew Luke John 1 Corinthians 1 John Ephesians Mark Romans 1 Peter
Across the New Testament14 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 223 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.91c. AD 40

εἰπάτω γάρ, τίς τέ ἐστι καὶ ποταπός, πνεῦμα ἢ αἷμα ἢ πῦρ ἢ ἀὴρ ἢ ἕτερόν τι [σῶμα], ἢ τοσοῦτόν γε ὅτι σῶμά ἐστιν ἢ πάλιν ἀσώματον.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.102c. AD 75–95

δεσπότας γὰρ ἁπάντων ὑμᾶς εἶναι πεποίηκα τῶν τε χερσαίων καὶ νηκτῶν καὶ ὅσα τὴν μετάρσιον αἰώραν ἔχει καὶ φοράν, χωρὶς αἵματος·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.5c. AD 100

πλήρης εἰμὶ ὁλοκαυτωμάτων, καὶ στέαρ ἀρνῶν καὶ αἷμα ταύρων καὶ τράγων οὐ βούλομαι, οὐδ̓ ἂν ἔρχησθε ὀφθῆναί μοι, τίς γὰρ ἐξεζήτησεν ταῦτα ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν ὑμῶν;

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 2nd c. BC 3rd c. BC
P.Tebt. 3.2 730Tebtynis (Arsinoites)179 BC

τῆι ε τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος μηνὸς ἐφοδεύων … τὰ περὶ τὴν κώμην πεδία εὗρον ἔκχυσιν αἵματος , πυνθάνομαι δὲ τῶν ἐκ τῆς κώμης Θεόδοτον Δωσιθέου ἐξελθόντα ὡς ἐπὶ ταῦτα μηκέτʼ

P.Oslo 3 95OxyrhynchosAD 96

τοῦ ὑπηρέτου εὗρον ἐπὶ τῷ μέσῳ δακτύλῳ τραῦμα , ὃ καὶ θεραπεύω, καὶ συνδρομὴν αἵματος ἐπὶ τῷ μαστῷ καὶ ἐξεμοῦσαν καὶ πυρέττουσαν. διὸ προσφωνῶ. ἔτους ιε Αὐτοκράτορος Καίσαρος Δομιτιανοῦ

P.Laur. 3 60OxyrhynchosAD 201–AD 300

θύραν ἐπισφραγεῖσαν ἀνεωγμένην … ων … τῶν χοίρων ἓξ χοίραν μίαν … α τὸ αἷμα ἀπέκειτο

how much more the blood <the> of Christ, who through [the] Spirit eternal Himself offered unblemished <the> to God, will purify the conscience of us from dead works in order <the> to serve God [the] living?
τοῦho <the> G3588 Article · genitive · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Hebrews as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-GSM — Article · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
<the>19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

how much more the blood <the> of Christ, who through [the] Spirit eternal Himself offered unblemished <the> to God, will purify the conscience of us from dead works in order <the> to serve God [the] living?
Χριστοῦ,Christos of Christ, G5547 Noun · genitive · singular · masculine
529× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Hebrews as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Christ means anointed, referring to Jesus as the Messiah, as seen in Luke 2:11 and John 1:41.
Amplified meaning
the Anointed One
Tyndale gloss
Christ
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

Χριστός (Christos) means 'anointed' and refers specifically to the Messiah, a title used for Jesus in the New Testament. The term is derived from the verb χρίω (to anoint) and appears in various contexts, including references to anointing oil and the anointed kings of Israel. It is used substantively as 'the Christ' in many New Testament verses, such as Matthew 2:4 and John 1:20.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

χριστός (Χρ-), -ή, -όν

(< χρίω),

[in LXX for מָשִׁיחַ and cogn. forms ;]

as adj.,

of things, anointing, to be used as ointment (Æsch., Eur., al.; τ. ἔλαιον τὸ χ., Le 21:10);

of persons, anointed (ὁ ἰερεὺς ὁ χ., Le 4:5; οἱ χ. ἰευρεῖς, II Mac 1:10): ὁ χ. τοῦ κυρίου or Θεοῦ (I Ki 2:10, Ps 2:2, al.), of the Messiah (Aram., מְשִׁיחָא; cf. Dalman, Words, 289 ff.), Lk 2:11, 26 Jo 1:41, Ac 2:36 4:26, al.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

Χριστός, τή, -dv, (xpiw), Sept. for mw, anointed: 6 | ἱερεὺς ὁ χριστός, Lev. iv. 5; vi. 22; of χριστοὶ ἱερεῖς, 2 Mace. i. 10; the patriarchs are called, substantively, of χριστοὶ θεοῦ, Ps. civ. (cv.) 15; the sing. 6 χριστὸς τοῦ κυρίου (177 Mw) in the O. T. often of the king of Israel (see χρίσμα), as 1 S. ii. 10, 35; [xxiv. 11; xxvi. 9, 11, 23]; 2.5. 1. 14; Ps. ii. 2; xvii. (xviii.) 51; Hab. iii. 13; [2 Chr. xxii. 7]; also of a foreign king, Cyrus, as sent of God, Is. xlv. 1; of the coming king whom the Jews expected to be the saviour of their nation and the author of their highest felicity: the name ὁ χριστός (mw, Chald. xmw>) is not found in the O. T. but is first used of him in the Book of Enoch 48, 10 [ef. Schodde’s note]; 52, 4 (for the arguments by which some have attempted to prove that the section containing these passages is of Christian origin are not convincing [cf. υἱὸς τοῦ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

Χριστός (Christos) — Christ.

χριστός, ή, όν,

(χρίω) to be rubbed on, used as ointment or salve, opposed to πιστός, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ ἔλαιον τὸ χ. anointing oil, [LXX]

II. of persons, anointed, ὁ ἱερεύς ὁ χ. [LXX]

II.2. especially of the Kings of Israel, ὁ χ. Κυρίου[LXX]; plural, of the patriarchs, [LXX]

II.3. in NT, ὁ χ. the Messiah, [NT]; then used as proper name of Jesus, Ἰησοῦς χ. [NT]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

Χριστός

Christos

from 5548; anointed, i.e. the Messiah, an epithet of Jesus:--Christ.

see GREEK for 5548

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

Χριστός, οῦ, ὁ

n.m.

anointed, the Messiah, the Christ

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

Χριστός Christos 529x

pr. anointed; ὁ Χριστός, the Christ, the Anointed One, i.e. Μεσσίας, the Messiah, Mt. 1:16, 17; Jn. 1:20, 25, 42; meton. Christ, the word or doctrine of Christ, 2 Cor. 1:19; 21; Eph. 4:20; Christ, a truly Christian frame of doctrine and affection, Rom. 8:10; Gal. 4:19; Christ, the Church of Christ, 1 Cor. 12:12; Christ the distinctive privileges of the Gospel of Christ, Gal. 3:27; Phil.…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSM — Noun · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Easton's Bible Dictionary

Christ

Anointed, the Greek translation of the Hebrew word rendered “Messiah” (q.v.), the official title of our Lord, occurring five hundred and fourteen times in the New Testament. It denotes that he was anointed or consecrated to his great redemptive work as Prophet, Priest, and King of his people. He is Jesus the Christ (Acts 17:3; 18:5; Matt. 22:42), the Anointed One. He is thus spoken of by Isaiah (61:1), and by Daniel (9:24-26), who styles him “Messiah the Prince.”

The Messiah is the same person as “the seed of the woman” (Gen. 3:15), “the seed of Abraham” (Gen. 22:18), the “Prophet like unto Moses” (Deut.…

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 16 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome Polycarp Josephus The Epistle of Barnabas
JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 8.137c. AD 75–95

τὸ δὲ ἄλλο μέχρι τῆς στέγης χριστὸν ἦν καὶ καταπεποικιλμένον χρώμασι καὶ βαφαῖς.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.6c. AD 100

ταῦτα οὖν κατήργησεν, ἵνα ὁ καινὸς νόμος τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, ἄνευ ζυγοῦ ἀνάγκης ὤν, μὴ ἀνθρωποποίητον ἔχῃ τὴν προσφοράν.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement preface.1c. AD 96

Ἡ ἐκκλησία τοῦ θεοῦ ἡ παροικοῦσα Ῥώμην τῆ ἐκκλησίᾳ τοῦ θεοῦ τῇ παροικούσῃ Κόρινθον, κλητοῖς ἡγιασμένοις ἐν θελήματι θεοῦ διὰ τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
7th c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 5th c. AD 8th c. AD

τὸ μῆκος πήχεις πέντε πλάτος πήχεις τέσσαρες ἥμισυ· βάψον δὲ εἰς τὸ βῆλον σημεῖον Χριστοῦ … … ἐπάνω τ … . προσαγορεύω πάντας τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς κατʼ ὄνομα ἀπὸ μικρῶν

P.Petra 3 29Petra (Tertia Palaestina Salutaris)AD 582–AD 592

r βασιλείας τοῦ δεσπότου ἡμῶν Φλαουίου Μαυρικίου πιστοῦ ἐν Χριστῷ ἡμέρου μεγίστου εὐεργέτου καὶ αὐτοκράτορος Αὐγούστου ἔτους … … … … … … ημερ

P.Petra 3 31Petra (Tertia Palaestina Salutaris)AD 582–AD 592

βασιλείας τοῦ δεσπότου ἡμῶν Φλαουίου Μαυρικίου Τιβερίου πιστοῦ ἐν Χριστῷ ἡμέρου μεγίστου εὐεργέτου καὶ αὐτοκράτορος Αὐγούστου ἔτους … … … … … … τήνδε

how much more the blood <the> of Christ, who through [the] Spirit eternal Himself offered unblemished <the> to God, will purify the conscience of us from dead works in order <the> to serve God [the] living?
ὃςhos, hē who G3739 Relative pronoun · nominative · singular · masculine
1,407× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Hebrews as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The word which is a pronoun used to ask for or identify something, as seen in John 5:11. It can also be used to describe a person or thing, such as in Mark 15:23. This word helps to clarify or specify what is being talked about.
Tyndale gloss
which
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ὅς is a pronoun meaning 'who,' 'which,' 'what,' or 'that.' It serves as both a demonstrative and a relative pronoun, agreeing in gender with its antecedent. The New Testament uses it in various constructions, including phrases like ὃς μὲν... ὃς δέ to indicate contrasting subjects. Notably, it can express purpose or cause in certain contexts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ,

the postpositive article (ἄρθρον ὑποτακτικόν).

As demonstr. pron. = οὗτος, ὅδε, this, that, also for αὐτός, chiefly in nom.: ὅς δέ, but he (cf. ἦ δὲ ὅς, freq. in Plat.), Mk 15:23, Jo 5:11; ὃς μὲν . . . ὃς δέ, the one . . . the other, Mt 21:35 22:5 25:15, Lk 23:33, Ac 27:14, Ro 14:5, I Co 11:21, II Co 2:16, Ju 22; neut., ὃ μὲν . . . ὃ δέ, the one . . . the other, some . . . some, Mt 13:8, 23, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὅς 455 ὅς iii. 5 [RG], 6; Heb. vi. 10; ix. 20; Jas. ii. 5; 1 In. iii. 24; Jude 15; for other exx. see below; ἐν ὥρᾳ 7 οὐ γινώoxet, Mt. xxiv. 50; τῇ παραδύσει 9 παρεδώκατε, Mk. vii. 13 ; add, Lk. ii. 20; v. 9; ix. 435 xii. 46; xxiv. 25; Jn. xvii. 5; Acts ii. 22; xvii. 31; xx. 38; 2 Co. xii. 21; 2Th.i. 4; Rev. xviii. 6; ef. W. § 24,1; [B. as above]. Rarely attraction oceurs where the verb governs the dative [but see below]: thus, κατέναντι οὗ ἐπίστευσε θεοῦ for xarévavre θεοῦ, ᾧ ἐπίστευσε (See κατέναντι). Ro. iv. 17; φωνῆς, ἧς ἔκραξα (for 7 (al. ἥν, οἴ. W. 164 (154 sq.) Β. 287 (217)}7), Acts xxiv. 21, οἵ. Is. vi. 4; (7γετο δὲ καὶ τῶν ἑαυτοῦ τε πιστῶν, οἷς ἥδετο καὶ ὧν ἠπίστει πολλούς, for καὶ πολλοὺς τούτων, οἷς ἠπίστει, Xen. Cyr. ὅ, 4, 39; ὧν ἐγὼ ἐντετύχηκα οὐδείς; for οὐδεὶς τούτων, οἷς ἐντετ. Plato, Gorg. p. 509 ἃ.; Protag. p. 361 6.; derep.7 p.531e.; παρ᾽ ὧν βοηθεῖς, οὐδεμίαν λήψει…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ος is found as a demonstrative pronoun in P Ryl II. 14415 (complaint of assault—a.D. 38) ὃς δὲ ἐκ τοῦ ἐναντίου ἄλογον ἀηδίαν μοι ἐπιχειρήσας παρεχρήσατό μοι πολλὰ καὶ ἄσχημα, ‘“whereupon he opposing me made a brutal and odious attack upon me and subjected me to much shameful mishandling” (Edd.): cf. Mk 15%, Jn 51. For ὃς μέν... ὃς δέ, “the one . . the other,” as in Mt 21° a/., see P Oxy IX. 1189? (c. A.D. 117) ἐπιστολὰς δύο ds ἔγραψα ἣν μὲν σοὶ ἣν δὲ Σαβείνῳ, and for ὃς δέ solétarium see PSI. IV. 313° (iii/iv A.D.) with the editor’s note. Ὃς ἄν (ἐάν) c. conj. = ‘‘ whosoever ” may be illustrated Ly P Par 4622 (B.c. 153) (= Witkowski*, p. 87), περὶ dv ἂν βούληι γράφε, P Grenf I. 30% (B.c. 103) ἐφ} οἷς ἂν οὖν ὑμῶν προσδέωνται, P Oxy IV. 743%% (B.C. 2) ἐν ols ἐὰν σοῦ προσδέηται, °° ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐὰν θέλῃς. For the comparative usage of ὃς ἄν and ὃς ἐάν, see Thackeray Gr. i. p. 68, cited s.v. ἄν.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὅς (hos, hē) — which.

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ,

genitive οὗ, ἧς, οὗ, etc.; dative plural οἷς, αἷς, οἷς, etc.: Epic dialect forms, genitive ὅου (probably replacing Οο) in the phrases ὅου κλέος οὔ ποτ᾽ ὀλεῖται [Refs 8th c.BC+]; feminine ἕης [Refs 8th c.BC+]; elsewhere only ἧς [Refs]; dative plural οἷς, οἷσι, ᾗς, ᾗσι (never αἷς or αἷσι in [Refs 8th c.BC+] — _pronoun_ used,

__A as demonstrative by the side of οὗτος, ὅδε, and the Article ὁ, ἡ, τό: in post-Homeric Gr. this use survived only in a few special phrases.

__B as a Relat. by the side of the Article ὅ, ἥ, τό (see. ὁ, ἡ, τό, c):—this demonstrative and Relat. pronoun must not be confounded with the Possess. ὅς, ἥ, ὅν. (With Gr. Relat. ὅς, ἥ, ὅ cf. Sanskrit Relat. yas, yā, yad, Lithuanian jis, ji (he, she), Oslav. i, ja, je (he, she…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὅς ἥ ὅ

hos

he hay, and neuter

ho ho

probably a primary word (or perhaps a form of the article 3588); the

relatively (sometimes demonstrative) pronoun, who, which, what,

that:--one, (an-, the) other, some, that, what, which, who(-m, -se),

etc. See also 3757.

see GREEK for 3588

see GREEK for 3757

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ

Rel.pr.

who, which, what, that

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὅς hos 1x

who, which, what, that, Mt. 1:16, 23, 25; in NT interrog. ἐφ’ ὅ, wherefore, why, Mt. 26:50; in NT ὅς μὲν ... ὅς δέ, for ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, Mt. 21:35; 2 Cor. 2:16

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Rel-NSM — Relative pronoun · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

R-NSM Part of Speech: Relative pronoun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
25%which
which25% · 356×whom20% · 291×who17% · 238×that14% · 199×what8% · 117×whatever2% · 30×whose2% · 29×other renderings10% · 145×other renderings2% · 25×

1,430 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 60 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object40%subject29%adverbial26%indirect object3%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,407 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ἐν
ἡμέραa dayαὐτόςἵναin order that, s
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἔχωI have, hold, poυἱόςa son, descenden
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakἀπόλλυμιI destroy, lose,δοῦλος (II)
διά
ἐκεῖνοςΧριστόςanointed, the Meαὐτός
εἰς
καίand, even, also,ἐγώοἰκίαa house, househo
ὅςwho1407×
what comes after →
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theμεθερμηνεύωI translate, intκαίand, even, also,
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existἔξεστι(ν)it is permitted,γινώσκωI come to know,
Article the
θεόςGod, a godυἱόςa son, descendenκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
καίand, even, also, nam
σύποιέωI do, makeαὐτός
δέbut, on the other ha
ἄνDisjἑξήκονταIndecτριάκονταIndec

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὅς · 1,407× in the New Testament
Acts Luke John Matthew Romans Mark Hebrews Revelation 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Colossians Ephesians

22 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 33c. AD 40

ἵν’ οὖν μὴ αἰεὶ συμφερόμεναι στασιάζωσι καὶ πόλεμος ἀντ’ εἰρήνης ἐπικρατῇ τὴν ἀκοσμίαν ἐν κόσμῳ τιθείς, οὐ μόνον ἐχώρισε φῶς καὶ σκότος, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὅρους ἐν μέσοις ἔθετο διαστήμασιν, οἷς ἀνεῖρξε τῶν ἄκρων ἑκάτερον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

πῶς τὸ Σοδομιτῶν ἔθνος θεὸς κατεστρέψατο χολωθεὶς αὐτοῖς ἐφ' οἷς ἡμάρτανον.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.8c. AD 100

Μωϋσῆ Μωϋσῆ, κατάβηθι τὸ τάχος, ὅτι ἠνόμησεν ὁ λαός σου, οὓς ἐξήγαγες ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, καὶ συνῆκεν Μωϋσῆς καὶ ἔριψεν τὰς δύο πλάκας ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτοῦ: καὶ συνετρίβη αὐτῶν ἡ διαθήκη, ἵνα ἡ τοῦ ἠγαπημένου Ἰησοῦ ἐγκατασφραγισθῇ εἰς τὴν καρδίαν ἡμῶν…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 2nd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ Ψενανοῦπιν καὶ … … ελθεῖν ἐπὶ προ … ους καὶ γραψάτωσαν ἡμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐσπούδασας διὰ τὰς ἡμῶν παρακλήσεις καὶ ση

P.Adl. 15Pathyris (?)101 BC

ἐδάνεισεν Ὧρος Ὥρου Ὥρωι Νεχούτου ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος μελίχρως ὑποκλαστὸς ἀναφάλακρος μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν οὖς ἀριστερὸν τετρημένον πυροῦ ἀρτάβας τεσσαράκοντα ἓξ κριθῆς ἑξήκοντα ἐννέα , ἴσους ἀτόκους, ὧν ἀπόδοσιν

P.Adl. 17Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC

τῆς ἐπιγονῆς τῶν ἐκ Παθύρεως ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος μελίχρως τετανὸς ἀναφάλακρος μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν οὖς ἀριστερὸν τετρημένον χαλκοῦ ταλάντων πέντε . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην

how much more the blood <the> of Christ, who through [the] Spirit eternal Himself offered unblemished <the> to God, will purify the conscience of us from dead works in order <the> to serve God [the] living?
διὰdia through G1223 Preposition
667× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Hebrews than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Means through or because of, like in Matthew 2:12 where the wise men left by another route. It shows cause or occasion, as in 1 Corinthians 3:15, being saved through fire. It can also describe a state or condition, like in Romans.
Tyndale gloss
through/because of
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

διά (dia) is a preposition meaning 'through' and can govern both the genitive and accusative cases. It covers a range of uses, including indicating motion through space or time, causation, and means or instrumentality. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as in Matthew 2:12 and Romans 8:25. The lexicons do not present significant disagreement regarding its meanings.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

διά (before a vowel δ’, exc. Ro 8:10, II Co 5:7, and in pr. names; Tdf., Pr., 94),

prep. c. gen., acc, as in cl.;

c. gen., through;

of Place, after verbs of motion or action: Mt 2:12 12:43, Mk 2:23, Lk 4:30, Jo 4:4, II Co 11:33, al.; σώζεσθαι (διας-) δ. πυρός, ὕδατος, I Co 3:15, I Pe 3:20; βλέπειν δ. ἐσόπτρου, I Co 13:12; metaph., of a state or condition:

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

διὰ παντός [so L WH Tr (exc. Mk. ν. 5; Lk. xxiv. 53)], or written together διαπαντός [so GT (exe. in Mt.) ; ef. W. 46 (45); Lipsius, Gram. Unters. p. 125], continually, always: Mt. xviii. 10; Mk. ν. 5; Lk. xxiv. 53; Acts ii. 25 (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 8); x. 2; xxiv. 16; Ro. xi. 10 (fr. Ps. Ixviii. (Lxix.) 24); 2 Th. iii. 16; Heb. ix. 6; xiii. 15, (often in Grk. writ.). b. of the time within which a thing is done: διὰ τῆς νυκτός (1, Τ Tr WH διὰ νυκτός), by night, Acts ν. 19; xvi. 9; xvii. 10; xxiii. 31, (Palaeph. 1,10); δύ ἡμερῶν τεσσαράκοντα, repeatedly within the space of forty days, Acts i. 3;— (denying this use of the prep., C. F. A. Fritzsche in Fritzschiorum Opusce. p. 164 sq. would refer these instances to the use noted under a. [see Win., Ellic., Mey. u. s.]). 2. of time elapsed, and which has, so to say, been passed through: Gal. ii. 1 [ef. W. 380 (356)]; δὲ ἡμερῶν, (some) days…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

διά (A.D. 58) ἀπεσχηκυῖαι [παρὰ τοῦ ᾿Αντ]ιφάνους διὰ χειρὸς [ἐϊξ οἴκου ὃ καὶ ἐπε[ίσθη]σαν κεφάλαιον, ‘have received from Antiphanes from hand to hand in cash the sum which they severally consented to accept ” (Edd.). Among other stereotyped phrases may be mentioned διὰ παντός, common in papyri as in Bibl. Greek in place of the obsolescent ἀεί : thus P Lond 42° (B.c. 168) (=I. p. 30, Selections Ὁ. 9) σοῦ διὰ παντὸς μνείαν ποιούμενοι, LGU IV. 1078* (A.p. 39) Σαραπίων Σαραπιάδι τῇ ἀδελφῇ πλεῖστα χαίρειν καὶ διὰ παντὸς ὑγιαίνειν. A rather different temporal use appears in διὰ νυκτός, “by night’ (Ac 519 etc.), as P Ryl II. 1381 (A.D. 34) κατέλαβα τοῦτον διὰ νυκτὸς ἡλμένον ἐξ ὑπερβατῶν els τὠιὸ τῆς οὐσίας ἐποίκιον Δρομήως λεγώμενου (7. ε. -όμενον), “ΕἼ detected him when under cover of night he had sprung into the farmstead” (Edd.): it is hard to imagine Fritzsche (see Grimm) arguing that here…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

διά (dia) — through/because of.

διά,

poetry διαί (Aeolic dialect ζά, which see), preposition governing genitive and accusative — Rad. sense, through; never anastrophic [Prop. δῐᾰ: but [Refs 8th c.BC+] uses ῑ at the beginning of a line, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also ᾱ, for the sake of meter, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+] uses διαί in Lyric poetry, [Refs]

__A WITH GEN.

__A.I of Place or Space:

__A.I.1 of motion in a line, from one end to the other, right through, in [Refs 8th c.BC+] frequently of the effect of weapons, διὰ μὲν ἀσπίδος ἦλθε.. ἔγχος καὶ διὰ θώρηκος.. [Refs 8th c.BC+] out through the Scaean gate, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; δι᾽ ἠέρος αἰθέρ᾽ ἵκανεν quite through the lower air even to the ether, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; διὰ Τρώων πέτετο straight through them,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: also in Compos. with πρό and ἐκ, see at {διαπρό},{διέκ}: in adverbial phrases, διὰ πασῶν (i.e.…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

διά

dia

a primary preposition denoting the channel of an act; through (in very

wide applications, local, causal, or occasional):--after, always,

among, at, to avoid, because of (that), briefly, by, for (cause) ...

fore, from, in, by occasion of, of, by reason of, for sake, that,

thereby, therefore, X though, through(-out), to, wherefore, with

(-in). In composition it retains the same general importance.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

διά

Prep.

through, on account of

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

διά dia 667x

(1) gen., through, used of place or medium, Mt. 7:13; Lk. 6:1; 2 Cor. 11:33; through, of time, during, in the course of, Heb. 2:15; Acts 5:19; through, of immediate agency, causation, instrumentality, by means of, by, Jn. 1:3; Acts 3:18; of means or manner, through, by, with, Lk. 8:4; 2 Cor. 5:7; 8:8; of state or condition, in a state of, Rom.…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

διά through c. gen. through, by means of c. acc.

through.

WITH GEN.:

of Place or Space:

of motion in a line, through, right through, διὰ μὲν ἀσπίδος ἦλθε ἔγχος Il.; δι᾽ ἠέρος αἰθέρ᾽ ἵκανεν quite through the lower air even to the ether, id. Il.; διὰ πάντων ἐλθεῖν to go through all in succession, Xen.

of motion through a space, but not in a line, all through, over, διὰ πεδίοιο Il.; δι᾽ ἄστεος Od.

of Intervals of Space, διὰ δέκα ἐπάλξεων at every 10th battlement, Thuc.; διὰ πέντε σταδίων at a distance of 5 stades, Hdt.

of Time:

throughout, during, διὰ παντὸς τοῦ χρόνου Hdt.; δι᾽ ἡμέρης all day long, id. Hdt.; διὰ παντός continually, Aesch.; δι᾽ ὀλίγου for a short time, Thuc.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
57%through
through57% · 391×because of22% · 153×on account of10% · 67×for2% · 14×the sake of2% · 14×other renderings6% · 44×

683 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 21 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial96%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 667 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
θεόςGod, a godπᾶςall, the whole, καυματίζωI burn, scorch
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakμαθητήςa learner, disciἐνώπιονbefore the face
θεόςGod, a god
Article theδέbut, on the otheσοφόςwise
σύ
ἐνπρόςδίδωμιI offer, give
ἐγώ
καίand, even, also,εἶπονI say, speakἐνώπιονbefore the face
διάthrough667×
what comes after →
Article the
λόγοςa word, speech, ὄνομαname, character,προφήτηςa prophet, poet
οὗτος
λέγωI say, speakArticle theκαίand, even, also,
ὅς
Article theαἰτίαa cause, reason,καίand, even, also,
αὐτός
Article theγίνομαιI come into beinκαίand, even, also,
τίςIrg
οὐNegArticle theμετά

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδιά · 667× in the New Testament
Romans Acts John Matthew Hebrews 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Luke Mark Ephesians Galatians 1 Peter

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 663 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 5c. AD 40

οὐ μὴν διὰ τοῦθ’ ἡσυχαστέον, ἀλλ’ ἕνεκα τοῦ θεοφιλοῦς καὶ ὑπὲρ δύναμιν ἐπιτολμητέον λέγειν, οἴκοθεν μὲν οὐδέν, ὀλίγα δ’ ἀντὶ πολλῶν, ἐφ’ ἃ τὴν ἀνθρωπίνην διάνοιαν φθάνειν εἰκὸς ἔρωτι καὶ πόθῳ σοφίας κατεσχημένην.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.4c. AD 75–95

τὸν μὲν γὰρ πρὸς τοὺς Ῥωμαίους πόλεμον ἡμῖν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις γενόμενον καὶ τὰς ἐν αὐτῷ πράξεις καὶ τὸ τέλος οἷον ἀπέβη πείρᾳ μαθὼν ἐβιάσθην ἐκδιηγήσασθαι διὰ τοὺς ἐν τῷ γράφειν λυμαινομένους τὴν ἀλήθειαν,

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.7c. AD 100

ἐγνώρισεν γὰρ ἡμῖν ὁ δεσπότης διὰ τῶν προφητῶν τὰ παρεληλυθότα καὶ τὰ ἐνεστῶτα, καὶ τῶν μελλόντων δοὺς ἀπαρχὰς ἡμῖν γεύσεως, ὧν τὰ καθ̓ ἕκαστα βλέποντες ἐνεργούμενα, καθὼς ἐλάλησεν, ὀφείλομεν πλουσιώτερον καὶ ὑψηλότερον προσάγειν τῷ φόβῳ αὐτοῦ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Adl. 12Pathyris102 BC

ἀρουρῶν ἑπτὰ ἀρούρας τρεῖς · γείτονες μιᾶς μὲν νότου γῆ Πατήφιος, βορρᾶ γῆ Πακοίβιος διὰ τῶν Φίβιος υἱῶν, ἀπηλιώτου ὁδὸς βασιλική, λιβὸς γῆ Ψεμμώνθου τοῦ Πανεχάτου καὶ τῶν μετόχων,

P.Adl. 14Pathyris101 BC

ἐν σφραγῖσι δυσίν , ὧν γείτονες μιᾶς μὲν νότου γῆ Πατήφιος, βορρᾶ γῆ Πακοίβιος διὰ τῶν Φίβιος υἱῶν, ἀπηλιώτου ὁδὸς βασιλική, λιβὸς γῆ Ψεμμώνθου τοῦ Πανεχάτου καὶ τῶν μετόχων,

P.Amh. 2 51Pathyris89 BC

ἀπὸ ἀπηλιώτου μέρει Παθύρεως οἰκίαν ᾠκοδομημένην καὶ δεδοκωμένην καὶ τεθυρωμένην ἧς αἱ γειτνίαι δεδήλωνται διὰ τῆς ὠνῆς.

how much more the blood <the> of Christ, who through [the] Spirit eternal Himself offered unblemished <the> to God, will purify the conscience of us from dead works in order <the> to serve God [the] living?
πνεύματοςpneuma [the] Spirit G4151 Noun · genitive · singular · neuter
379× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Hebrews as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for spirit or breath refers to the vital principle or mental disposition of a person, as seen in John 3:8 and 1 Corinthians 5:5. It can also mean a superhuman spirit, like the Holy Spirit in Acts 2:2.
Amplified meaning
the divine breath
Tyndale gloss
spirit/breath: spirit
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word πνεῦμα (i.e., *pneuma*) means 'spirit' or 'breath' and is derived from the verb πνέω (to blow). It encompasses various meanings, including air in motion, the vital principle of life, and spiritual beings such as angels and demons. In the New Testament, it frequently refers to the Holy Spirit and the human spirit, appearing in contexts that contrast it with the body or flesh.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — πνοή, πνεῦμα, ἄνεμος, θύελλα from a scan

From the words into comparison with which πνεῦμα is here brought, it will be evident that it is proposed to deal with it in its natural and earthly, not in its supernatural and heavenly, meaning. Only I will observe, that on the relations between πνοή and πνεῦμα in this its higher sense there is a discussion in Augustine, De Civ. Dei, xiii. 22; cf. De Anim. et huj. Orig. i. 14, 19. The first three words of this group, as they designate not things heavenly but things earthly, differ from one another exactly as, according to Seneca, do in the Latin ‘aér,’ ‘spiritus,’ ‘ ventus’ (Nat. Qu. v. 13) : ‘Spiritum a vento motus' separat; vehementior enim spiritus ventus est; invicem spiritus leviter fluens aer.’ Πνοή and πνεῦμα occur not seldom together, as at Isai. xlii. 5; lvii. 16; πνοή conveying the impression of a lighter, gentler, motion of the air than πνεῦμα, as ‘aura’ than ‘ventus.’…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πνεῦμα, -τος, τό,

(< πνέω),

[in LXX chiefly and very freq. for רוּחַ;]

of air in motion;

wind: Jo 3:8; pl., He 1:7(LXX);

breath: π. ζωῆς, Re 11:11; π. τοῦ στόματος, fig., II Th 2:8 (cf. Ps 32 (33):6).

Of the vital principle, the spirit (Arist., Polyb., al.): Lk 8:55, Jo 19:30, Ac 7:59, al.; opp. to σάρξ, Mt 26:41, Mk 14:38, I Co 5:5, al.; to σῶμα, Ro 8:10, I Co 6:17 7:34,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πνεῦμα, -τος, τό, (πνέω), Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down; Hebr. may, Lat. spiritus; i. 6. 1. a movement of air, (gentle) blast; a. of the wind: ἀνέμων πνεύματα, Hat. 7,16, 1; Paus. 5, 25; hence the wind itself, Jn. iii. 8; plur. Heb. i. 7, (1 K. xviii. 45; xix. 11; Job i. 19; Ps. ciii. (civ.) 4, etc.; often in Grk. writ.). b. breath of the nostrils or mouth, often in Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down: πνεῦμα τοῦ στόματος, 2 Th. ii. 8 (Ps. xxxii. (xxxiii.) 6, ef. Is. xi. 4); mv. ζωῆς, the breath of life, Rev. xi. 11 (Gen. vi. 17, cf. πνοὴ ζωῆς, il. 7). [πνεῦμα and πνοή seem to have been in the main coincident terms; but avon became the more poetical. Both retain a suggestion of their evident etymology. Even in class. Grk. πνεῦμα became as freq. and as wide in its application as ἄνεμος. (Schmidt ch. 55, 7; Trench § lxxiii.) ] 2. the spirit, i.e. the vital principle by which the body 18…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πνεῦμα. This is a notable ex. of those words, whose meaning has been so deepened and enriched through Christian influences, that we cannot expect our sources to throw much light on their use in the NT. One or two points may, however, be noted. Thus for the more literal meaning of the word we may cite P Oxy VI. 9047 (v/A.D.), where a certain Flavius petitions a praeses on the ground ὡς λοιπὸν εἰς αὐτὸ τὸ τῆς σωτηρίας πνεῦμα δυστυχῖν pe, “so that at last the very breath of my life is in danger” (Edd.). In P Leid Wii 2 (ii/iii A.D.) (= II. p. 157) reference is made to a book which περιέχει γέννησιν πνεύματος, πυρὸς Kal okdTo(=ov)s, ‘contains the creation of spirit, fire and darkness.” The same document αν. 4 shows οὐ ἀντιτάξεταί μοι πᾶν πνεῦμα, οὐ δαιμόνιον, οὐ συνάτ(--άντ)ημα. Reminiscent of LXX Numb 1622, 2716, isthe Jewish ‘‘ prayer for vengeance” from Rheneia, Sy// 816 (=#1181)*, which…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πνεῦμα (pneuma) — spirit/breath: spirit.

πνεῦμα, ατος, τό,

(πνέω) blast, wind, first in [Refs 6th c.BC+]: frequently in Trag., etc., ἀνέμων πνεύματα πάντων [Refs 4th c.BC+]; θαλάσσας.. πνεύματι λάβρῳ [Refs 5th c.BC+] is commoner in Poets; [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κατὰ πρύμναν ἵσταται τὸ π.[Refs 5th c.BC+]; κατὰ πνεῦμα στῆναι τοῦ ἄρρενος to leeward of him, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but κατὰ π. προσιόντες down wind, [Refs]; πνεύματος ἀνείλησις, ἐκπύρωσις, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; as an element, air, [Refs 3rd c.AD+]

2. metaphorically, θαλερωτέρῳ π. with more genial breeze or influence, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; αἰδοίῳ π. χώρας with air or spirit of respect on the part of the country, [Refs]; π. ταὐτὸν οὔποτ᾽.. ἐν ἀνδράσιν φίλοις βέβηκεν the…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

πνεῦμα

pneuma

from 4154; a current of air, i.e. breath (blast) or a breeze; by

analogy or figuratively, a spirit, i.e. (human) the rational soul, (by

implication) vital principle, mental disposition, etc., or

(superhuman) an angel, demon, or (divine) God, Christ's spirit, the

Holy Spirit:--ghost, life, spirit(-ual, -ually), mind. Compare 5590.

see GREEK for 4154

see GREEK for 5590

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πνεῦμα, ατος, τό

n.n.

wind, breath, spirit

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πνεῦμα pneuma 379x

wind, air in motion, Jn. 3:8; breath, 2 Thess. 2:8; the substance spirit, Jn. 3:6; a spirit, spiritual being, Jn. 4:24; Acts 23:8, 9; Heb. 1:14; a bodiless spirit, specter, Lk. 24:37; a foul spirit, δαιμόνιον, Mt. 8:16; Lk. 10:20; spirit, as a vital principle, Jn. 6:63; 1 Cor.…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πνεῦμα πνεῦμα, ατος, τό, πνέω a blowing, πνεύματα ἀνέμων Hdt., Aesch.: alone, a wind, blast, Trag., etc.

metaph., θαλερωτέρῳ πν. with more genial breeze or influence, Aesch.; λύσσης πν. μάργῳ id. Aesch.; πν. ταὐτὸν οὔποτ᾽ ἐν ἀνδράσιν φίλοις βέβηκεν the wind is constantly changing even among friends, Soph.

like Lat. spiritus or anima, breathed air, breath, Aesch.; πν. βίου the breath of life, id. Aesch.; πν. ἀθροίζειν to collect breath, Eur.; πν. ἀφιέναι, ἀνιέναι, μεθιέναι to give up the ghost, id. Eur.; πνεύματος διαρροαί the wind-pipe, id. Eur.

that is breathed forth, odour, scent, id. Eur.

spirit, Lat. afflatus, Anth.: inspiration, NTest.

the spirit of man, id. NTest.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSN — Noun · genitive · singular · neuter
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

spir'-it (ruach; pneuma; Latin, spiritus):

1. Primary and Figurative Senses

(1) As Wind, Breath

(2) As Anger or Fury

(3) As Mental and Moral Qualities in Man

2. Shades of Meaning

(1) As Life-Principle

(2) As Surviving Death

(3) Spiritual Manifestations

3. Human and Divine Spirit

(1) The Human as Related with the Divine

(2) Operations of the Divine Spirit as Third Person of the Trinity

4. Old Testament Applications

5. Various Interpretations

1. Primary and Figurative Senses:

(1) As Wind, Breath:

Used primarily in the Old Testament and New Testament of the wind, as in Ge 8:1; Nu 11:31; Am 4:13 ("createth the wind"); Heb 1:7 (angels, "spirits" or "winds" in margin); often used of the breath, as…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Spirit

(Heb. ruah; Gr. pneuma), properly wind or breath. In 2 Thess. 2:8 it means “breath,” and in Eccl. 8:8 the vital principle in man. It also denotes the rational, immortal soul by which man is distinguished (Acts 7:59; 1 Cor. 5:5; 6:20; 7:34), and the soul in its separate state (Heb. 12:23), and hence also an apparition (Job 4:15; Luke 24:37, 39), an angel (Heb. 1:14), and a demon (Luke 4:36; 10:20). This…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

A word employed in various senses in Scripture.

1. For THE HOLY, HOLINESS SPIRIT, the third person of the Holy Trinity, who inspired the prophets, animates good men, pours his unction into our hearts, imparts to us life and comfort; and in whose name we are baptized and blessed, as well as in that of the Father and the Son. When the adjective Holy is applied to the term Spirit, we should always understand it as here explained; but there are many places whether it must be taken in this sense, although the term Holy is omitted. See HOLY, HOLINESS SPIRIT.

2. BREATH, respiration; or the principle of animal life, common to men and animal: this God has given, and this he recalls when he takes away life, Ec 3:21. See SOUL.

Nave's Topical Bible

→ Called “the inner man,” Ro 7:22; Eph 3:16

→ See ANGELS

→ See DEMONS

→ See HOLY SPIRIT

→ See MAN, A SPIRIT

→ See SATAN

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
90%spirit
spirit90% · 346×spirits8% · 31×other renderings2% · 8×

385 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 9 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial39%subject29%object21%predicate7%indirect object2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 379 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheτίςIrg
ἐν
βαπτίζωI dip, submerge,δέbut, on the otheἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
ἅγιοςset apart, holy, sac
Article theγάρforσύ
αὐτός
Article theθυγάτριονa little daughteλέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also, nam
πίνωI drink, imbibeἸσραήλPropμάστιξa scourge, lash,
πνεῦμα[the] Spirit379×
what comes after →
Article the
ἅγιοςset apart, holy,ἀκάθαρτοςunclean, impureθεόςGod, a god
ἅγιοςset apart, holy, sac
καίand, even, also,Article theἀτενίζωI direct my gaze
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theδύναμιςmight, power, maἀλήθειαtruth
ἐγώ
ἐπίἐπιτάσσωI give order, coοὗτος
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theἅγιοςset apart, holy,καίand, even, also,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπνεῦμα · 379× in the New Testament
Acts 1 Corinthians Luke Romans John Revelation Mark Matthew Galatians 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament25 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 173 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Josephus Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 29c. AD 40

εἶθ’ ὕδατος ἀσώματον οὐσίαν καὶ πνεύματος καὶ ἐπὶ πᾶσιν ἑβδόμου φωτός, ὃ πάλιν ἀσώματον ἦν καὶ νοητὸν ἡλίου παράδειγμα καὶ πάντων ὅσα φωσφόρα ἄστρα κατὰ τὸν οὐρανὸν ἔμελλε συνίστασθαι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.27c. AD 75–95

ταύτης δʼ ὑπʼ ὄψιν οὐκ ἐρχομένης, ἀλλὰ βαθεῖ μὲν κρυπτομένης σκότει, πνεύματος δʼ αὐτὴν ἄνωθεν ἐπιθέοντος, γενέσθαι φῶς ἐκέλευσεν ὁ θεός.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
7th c. AD 4th c. AD 8th c. AD 5th c. AD 6th c. AD

ἐν ὀνόματι τῆς ἁγίας καὶ ὁμοουσίου τριάδος πατρὸς καὶ υἱοῦ καὶ ἁγίου πνεύματος βασιλείας τοῦ θειοτάτου καὶ εὐσεβεστάτου ἡμῶν δεσπότου Φλαυίου Φωκᾶ τοῦ αἰωνίου Αὐγούστου Αὐτοκράτορος καὶ

Tyche 20 (2005), p. 1-9HerakleopolitesAD 603

r ἐν ὀνόματι τῆς ἁγίας τριάδος πατρὸς καὶ υἱοῦ καὶ ἁγίου πνεύματος καὶ τῆς δεσποίνης ἡμῶν τῆς θεοτόκου καὶ πάντων τῶν ἁγίων, βασιλείας τοῦ θειοτάτου καὶ

SB 1 4740ArsinoitesAD 602–AD 610

ἐν ὀνόματι τῆς ἁγίας καὶ ὁμοουσίου τριάδος πατρὸς καὶ υἱοῦ καὶ ἁγίου πνεύματος καὶ τῆς δεσποίνης

how much more the blood <the> of Christ, who through [the] Spirit eternal Himself offered unblemished <the> to God, will purify the conscience of us from dead works in order <the> to serve God [the] living?
αἰωνίουaiōnios eternal G166 Adjective · genitive · singular · neuter
71× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Hebrews than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means something that lasts forever, like God's love. In Romans 16:26 and 2 Timothy 1:9, it talks about eternal things that will never end.
Amplified meaning
age-lasting
Tyndale gloss
eternal
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word αἰώνιος (iōnios) means eternal or everlasting, derived from αἰών (aiōn), which refers to an age or period. It encompasses concepts of both timelessness and perpetual duration, often used in contexts like life, salvation, and divine promises. Notably, it appears in passages such as Romans 16:26 and Hebrews 9:12. The lexicons generally agree on its meaning, with no significant disagreements noted.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αἰώνιος, -ον (as usual in Attic), also -α, -ον. II Th 2:16, He 9:12;

(< αἰών),

[in LXX chiefly for עוֹלָם;]

age-long, eternal,

of that which is without either beginning or end: Ro 16:26, He 9:14;

of that which is without beginning: Ro 16:25, II Ti 1:9, Tit 1:2;

of that which is without end (MM, VGT, s.v.): σκηναί, Lk 16:9 οἰκία, II Co 5:1; διαθήκη, He 13:20; εὐαγγέλιον,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αἰώνιος, -ov, and (in 2 Th. ii. 16; Heb. ix. 12; Num. xxv. 13; Plat. Tim. p. 38 b. [see below]; Diod. i. 1; [ef. WH. App. p. 157; W. 69 (67); B. 26 (23)]) -os, -a, τον, (αἰών); 1. without beginning or end, thal which always has been and always will be: θεὸς, Ro. xvi. 26, (ὁ μόνος αἰώνιος, 2 Mace. i. 25); πνεῦμα, Heb. ix. 14. 2: without beginning: χρόνοις αἰωνίοις, Ro. xvi. 253 πρὸ χρόνων αἰωνίων, 2 Tim. i. 9; Tit. i. 2; εὐαγγέλιον a σοβροὶ whose subject-matter is eternal, i. e. the saving purpose of God adopted from eternity, Rev. xiv. 6. 3. withoul end, never to cease, everlasting: 2 Co. iv. 18 (opp. to πρόσκαιρος) ; αἰώνιον αὐτόν, joined to thee forever as a sharer of the same eternal life, Philem. 15; βάρος d0éns, 2 Co. iv. 17; βασιλεία, 2 Pet. i. 11; δόξα, 2 Tim. ii. 10; 1 Pet. v.10; ζωή (see ζωή, 2 b.); κληρονομία, Heb. ix. 15; λύτρωσις, Heb. ix. 12; παράκλησις, 2 Th. ii. 16…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αἰώνιος (aiōnios) — eternal.

αἰώνιος, ον,

also α, ον [NT+5th c.BC+]:— lasting for an age (αἰών 11), perpetual, eternal (but distinct from ἀΐδιος, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κακά, δεινά, [NT+5th c.BC+]; αἰ. διαθήκη, νόμιμον, πρόσταγμα, [LXX+NT+3rd c.AD+]; κόλασις [NT+6th c.AD+]

2. holding an office or title for life, perpetual, γυμνασίαρχος[Refs]

3. = Latin saecularis, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

4. adverb -ίως eternally, νοῦς ἀκίνητος αἰ. πάντα ὤν[Refs 5th c.AD+]; perpetually, μισεῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+]

5. αἰώνιον, τό, ={ἀείζωον τὸ μέγα}, Ps.-[Refs 1st c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

αἰώνιος

aionios

from 165; perpetual (also used of past time, or past and future as

well):--eternal, for ever, everlasting, world (began).

see GREEK for 165

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αἰώνιος, ία, ιον

Adj

eternal, unending

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αἰώνιος aiōnios 71x

indeterminate as to duration, eternal, everlasting

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αἰώνιος lasting for an age (αἰών 3), Plat.: ever-lasting, eternal, id. Plat.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-GSN — Adjective · genitive · singular · neuter
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-GSN Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

e-tur'-nal (`olam; aionios, from aion):

The word "eternal" is of very varying import, both in the Scriptures and out of them.

1. `Olam:

In the Old Testament, the Hebrew word `olam is used for "eternity," sometimes in the sense of unlimited duration, sometimes in the sense of a cycle or an age, and sometimes, in later Hebrew, in the signification of world. The Hebrew `olam has, for its proper New Testament equivalent, aion, as signifying either time of particular duration, or the unending duration of time in general. Only, the Hebrew term primarily signified unlimited time, and only in a secondary sense represented a definite or specific period. Both the Hebrew and the Greek terms signify the world itself, as it moves in time.

2. Aion, Aionios:

In the New Testament, aion and aionios are often used with the meaning "eternal," in the predominant sense of futurity. The word aion primarily…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
96%eternal
eternal96% · 66×other renderings4% · 3×

69 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object51%adverbial35%predicate9%subject4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 71 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ζωήlife
ἔχωI have, hold, poεἰςαὐτός
Article the
εἰςπῦρfire, trialsζωήlife
χρόνοςtime, a particular t
πρόμυστήριονanything hidden,
κόλασιςchastisement, punish
εἰς
εἰμίI am, exist
ἔνοχοςinvolved in, lia
αἰώνιοςeternal71×
what comes after →
Article the
δέbut, on the otheἑτοιμάζωI make ready, prκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
κληρονομέωI inherit, obtain
καίand, even, also, nam
εἰςἀνίστημιI raise up, set οὐNeg
ζωήlife
ἵναin order that, sὁράωI see, look uponεἰς
ἐν
Χριστόςanointed, the MeArticle theαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαἰώνιος · 71× in the New Testament
John 1 John Hebrews Matthew Romans Luke Mark 1 Timothy 2 Corinthians Titus 2 Thessalonians 2 Timothy
Across the New Testament19 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 99 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus Clement of Rome The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.199c. AD 40

ἀλλὰ μὴ μόνον ἑαυτοῦ καταμαρτυρείτω, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὑπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ καταδικασθεὶς αἰωνίαν καὶ βεβαιοτάτην ὑπομενέτω δουλείαν κελεύοντος τό τε οὖς τρυπᾶσθαι, ἵνα μὴ παραδέξηται λόγους ἀρετῆς, καὶ δουλεύειν τὸν αἰῶνα τῷ νῷ καὶ τῇ αἰσθήσει, κακοῖς καὶ ἀνηλεέσι…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.235c. AD 75–95

προεδήλου τε τὸ γένος τὸ αὐτῶν εἰς ἔθνη πολλὰ καὶ πλοῦτον ἐπιδώσειν, καὶ μνήμην αἰώνιον αὐτῶν ἔσεσθαι τοῖς γενάρχαις, τήν τε Χαναναίαν ὅπλοις κατακτησαμένους ζηλωτοὺς ἔσεσθαι πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 20.1c. AD 100

ὁδὸς γάρ ἐστιν θανάτου αἰωνίου μετὰ τιμωρίας, ἐν ᾖ ἐστιν τὰ ἀπολλύντα τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτῶν: εἰδωλολατρεία, θρασύτης, ὕψος δυνάμεως, ὑπόκρισις, διπλοκαρδία, μοιχεία, φόνος, ἁρπαγή, ὑπερηφανία, παράβασις, δόλος, κακία, αὐθάδεια, φαρμακεία, μαγεία,…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 7th c. AD 4th c. AD 5th c. AD undated
P.Berl.Frisk 3Ptolemais Euergetis (Arsinoites)AD 211–AD 212

ἐπαρχίαν ἀγαθῶν πεπληρῶσθαι, μάλιστα συντηροῦντός σου τοὺς γεωργοῦντας τὴν δημοσίαν γῆν τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν αἰωνίου ἀηττήτου Αὐτοκράτορος Μάρκου Αὐρηλίου Σευήρου Ἀντωνίνου καὶ πάσης κακίας ὑπό σου ἐκκοπείσης. καὶ γὰρ

P.Louvre 1 41Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 217

r Κλαυδίου Συρίωνος αἰωνίου γυμνασιάρχου τῆς λαμπροτάτης πόλεως τῶν Ἀλεξανδρέων καὶ ὡς χρηματίζει διὰ Ἀρχωνᾶ φροντιστοῦ τῶν περὶ

P.Flor. 2 190Theadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 252

Εὐδαίμων Ἡρωνίνῳ τῷ φιλτάτῳ χαίρειν. ἔπεμψά σοι σήμερον διὰ Κάρβωνος ὀνηλάτου κτηνῶν τεσσάρων καὶ Ἀιώνιος ὀνηλάτου κτηνῶν πέντε ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ θ σὺν διχώροις ιϛ ἁπλᾶ μονόχωρα λβ ἐξ

how much more the blood <the> of Christ, who through [the] Spirit eternal Himself offered unblemished <the> to God, will purify the conscience of us from dead works in order <the> to serve God [the] living?
ἑαυτὸνheautou Himself G1438 Reflexive pronoun · third person · accusative · singular · masculine
320× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Hebrews as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This reflexive pronoun means 'themself' or 'themselves', referring back to the subject of a sentence, as in Matthew 27:42 and Luke 23:35.
Amplified meaning
as a willing sacrifice
Tyndale gloss
themself
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἑαυτοῦ (i.e., *heautou*) is a reflexive pronoun meaning 'of himself, herself, itself,' and is used primarily in the third person. It appears in various contexts throughout the New Testament, often indicating actions done by a subject to themselves or emphasizing possession. Additionally, it can serve as a reciprocal pronoun in plural forms, indicating mutual actions among individuals.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἑαυτοῦ, -ῆς, -οῦ, dat. -ῷ, etc., acc. -όν, etc., pi. -ῶν, etc. (Att. contr. αὑτοῦ, etc);

reflex pron.;

prop, of 3rd person (Lat. sui, sibi, se), of himself, herself, itself, etc.: Mt 27:42, Mk 15:31, Lk 23:35, al.; added to a middle verb, διεμερίσαντο ἑαυτοῖς, Jo 19:24; to an active verb, Ac 14:14 (M, Pr., 157); ἀφ’ ἑαυτοῦ, Lk 12:57 21:30, Jo 5:19, al. (v.s. ἀπό); δι’ ἑαυτοῦ, Ro 14:14; ἐν ἑ., Mt 3:9, Mk 5:30, al.; εἰς ἑ., Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἑαυτοῦ (heautou) — themself.

ἑαυτοῦ, ῆς, οῦ, ἑαυτῷ, ῇ, ῷ, ἑαυτόν, ήν, ό,

plural ἑαυτῶν, ἑαυτοῖς, ἑαυτούς άς, ά: Ionic dialect ἑωυτοῦ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also ωὑτῆς [Refs 3rd c.BC+] in Papyrus and Inscrr., as [Refs 1st c.BC+]: Attic dialect contraction αὑτοῦ, etc., which is the usual form in Trag., though ἑαυτοῦ, etc., are used (though rarely) when the metre requires, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; Cretan dialect ϝιαυτοῦ Kohler-Ziebarth Stadtrecht von Gortyn [Refs]; Doric dialect αὐταυτοῦ, αὐσαυτοῦ (which see); Thess. εὑτοῦ (dative), [Refs]: genitive plural ηὑτῶν [Refs]:—reflexive pronoun of 3rd pers., of himself, herself, itself, etc.; first in [Refs 7th c.BC+], and Attic dialect [Refs 8th c.BC+] itself by itself, absolutely, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αὐτὸ ἐφ᾽ αὑτοῦ[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀφ᾽ ἑαυτῶν, ἑαυτοῦ, of themselves, himself, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ, see at…

Read the full entry →
Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἑαυτοῦ, ῆς, οῦ

Refl.pr.

himself, herself, itself

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἑαυτοῦ heautou 319x

himself, herself, itself, Mt. 8:22; 12:26; 9:21; also used for the first and second persons, Rom. 8:23; Mt. 23:31; also equivalent to ἀλλήλων, Mk. 10:26; Jn. 12:19; ἀφ’ ἑαυτοῦ, ἀφ’ ἑαυτῶν, of himself, themselves, voluntarily, spontaneously, Lk. 12:57; 21:30; of one’s own will merely, Jn. 5:19; δι’ ἑαυτοῦ, of itself, in its own nature, Rom. 14:14; ἐξ ἑαυτῶν, of one’s own self, 2 Cor.…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἑαυτοῦ reflex. Pron. of 3rd pers., Lat. sui, sibi, se, of himself, herself, itself, etc.; first in Hdt. and attic; Hom. has ἕο αὐτοῦ, οἷ αὐτῷ, ἑ αὐτόν:—αὐτὸ ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτό itself by itself, absolutely, Plat.; so τὸ ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτόν Thuc.; αὐτὸ καθ᾽ αὑτό Plat.;— ἀφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ of himself, Thuc., etc.; ἐν ἑαυτοῦ, ἐντὸς ἑαυτοῦ, Lat. sui compos: — παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ at his own house, Xen.; often with comp. and Sup., ἐγένοντο ἀμείνονες αὐτοὶ ἑωυτῶν they surpassed themselves, Hdt.; πλουσιώτεροι ἑαυτῶν, i. e. continually richer, Thuc.

in attic αὑτοῦ, sometimes for 1st or 2nd pers., Aesch., Soph.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
F-3ASM — Reflexive pronoun · third person · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

F-3ASM Part of Speech: reFlexive pronoun Person: third Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
34%himself
himself34% · 111×themselves20% · 67×yourselves14% · 48×his own7% · 24×their own6% · 21×ourselves6% · 20×itself3% · 11×other renderings5% · 18×other renderings3% · 11×

331 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 21 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object53%adverbial36%indirect object8%subject3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 320 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
θάπτωI buryεἰςἕκαστοςeach, every one
ἐν
λέγωI say, speakδιαλογίζομαιI reason, debateαὐτός
ἐπί
βασιλείαkingship, sovereἐκβάλλωI throw, cast, pοἰκίαa house, househo
πρός
λέγωI say, speakκρατέωI lay hold of, oδιαλογίζομαιI reason, debate
μετά
ἔχωI have, hold, poπαραλαμβάνωI take, receiveλαμβάνωI receive, take
ἑαυτοῦHimself320×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
αἴρωI raise, lift upεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inμερίζωI divide, part,
Article the
ἱμάτιονouter garmentἐκοἰκονόμοςa steward
λέγωI say, speak
ὅτιthat, since, becἐάνCondαὐτός
οὐNeg
δύναμαιI am powerful, aἵστημιI cause to standκρίνωI judge, decide,
ἀλλάbut, except
πρόσκαιροςtemporaryArticle theὅσος

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἑαυτοῦ · 320× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew 2 Corinthians John Mark Acts Romans 1 Corinthians Ephesians Hebrews Revelation Galatians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament25 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 9c. AD 40

τὸ δὲ παθητὸν ἄψυχον καὶ ἀκίνητον ἐξ ἑαυτοῦ, κινηθὲν δὲ καὶ σχηματισθὲν καὶ ψυχωθὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ νοῦ μετέβαλεν εἰς τὸ τελειότατον ἔργον, τόνδε τὸν κόσμον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.19c. AD 75–95

ἰστέον οὖν, ὅτι πάντων ἐκεῖνος ἀναγκαιότατον ἡγήσατο τῷ καὶ τὸν ἑαυτοῦ μέλλοντι βίον οἰκονομήσειν καλῶς καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις νομοθετεῖν θεοῦ πρῶτον φύσιν κατανοῆσαι καὶ τῶν ἔργων τῶν ἐκείνου θεατὴν τῷ νῷ γενόμενον οὕτως παράδειγμα τὸ πάντων ἄριστον…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.1c. AD 100

Ἡμερῶν οὖν οὐσῶν πονηρῶν καὶ αὐτοῦ τοῦ ἐνεργοῦντος ἔχοντος τὴν ἐξουσίαν, ὀφείλομεν ἑαυτοῖς προσέχοντες ἐκζητεῖν τὰ δικαιώματα κυρίου,

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 30Pathyris104 BC

καὶ ἡμῖν δὲ γράφοντες ὑπὲρ ὧν αἱρεῖσθε ὡς πᾶν προθυμότερον τελεωθησόμενον, ἐπιμελόμενοι δὲ καὶ ἑαυτῶν ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε. ἔρρωσθε. ἔτους ιδ τοῦ καὶ ια, Παῦνι ιε

P.Grenf. 1 33Thebais104 BC

κζ μέση μελίχρως λεύκωμα ὀφθαλμόν, μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύρριν αἱ τρεῖς τῶν Ψεμμίνιος μετὰ κυρίου τοῦ ἑαυτῶν ἀδελφοῦ Παχνούβιος τοῦ προγεγραμμένου καὶ συνπωλουμένου, ἀπὸ τῆς ὑπαρχούσης αὐτοῖς πατρικῆς γῆς ἠπείρου σιτοφόρου

P.Grenf. 1 35Ptolemais - Akko (Syrien)103 BC

πυρὸν τοῖς παρʼ ἡμῶν. διʼ ἄλλων γεγράφαμεν ὑμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν βουλόμεθα μηδεμιᾶς προσφωνήσεως προσπεπτωκυίας. ἑαυτῶν δὲ ἐπιμελόμενοι ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε, — ἔσμεν ἐν Πτολεμαίδι. ἔρρωσθε. ἔτους ιϛ, Θωῦθ η.

how much more the blood <the> of Christ, who through [the] Spirit eternal Himself offered unblemished <the> to God, will purify the conscience of us from dead works in order <the> to serve God [the] living?
προσήνεγκενprospherō offered G4374 Verb · aorist · active · indicative · third person · singular
46× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Hebrews than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To bring to means to lead or offer something to someone, especially to God, like in Matthew 4:24 where people brought their sick to Jesus. It's about presenting or offering something to someone.
Tyndale gloss
to bring to
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

προσφέρω is a verb meaning 'to bring to' or 'to offer,' often in the context of presenting gifts or sacrifices to God. It combines the elements of bringing something near and offering it, applicable in various contexts such as offerings in worship (e.g., Matthew 2:11) and dealing with others (Hebrews 12:7). The word appears frequently in the New Testament and is rooted in both classical and biblical Greek.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

προσ-φέρω,

[in LXX chiefly for קרב hi.;]

to bring to, lead to: c. acc. et dat. pers., Mt 4:24 8:16 9:2, 32 14:35 17:16, Mk 2:4 (WH, R, txt.; sc. αὐτόν) 10:13, Lk 18:15 23:14; pass., Mt 12:22 (act., WH, txt.) 18:24 (προσήχθη, WH) 19:13; c. acc. rei, Mt 25:20; id. c. dat. pers., Mt 22:19, Lk 23:36; τ. στόματι, Jo 19:29; metaph., c. dat pers., to deal with, He 12:7 (cl.).

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

προσ-φέρω; impf. προσέφερον; 1 aor. προσήνεγκα ; 2 aor. προσήνεγκον; pt. προσενήνοχα (Heb. xi. 17); Pass., pres. προσφέρομαι; 1 aor. προσηνέχθην ; [see reff. s. v. φέρω]; fr. [Pind.], Aeschyl., and Hdt. down; Sept. often for 277, also for #37, 0.21, ete., sometimes also for TIT where offering sacrifices is spoken of (as 1 Κα. xviii. 36 Compl.; 2 Chr. xxix. 7; Jer. xiv. 12); 1. to bring lo, lead to: twa τινι, one to a person who can heal him or is ready to show him some other kindness, Mt. iv. 24; viii. 16; ix. 2,32; xiv. 35; xvii. 16; Mk. ii. 4 (se. τινά) x WH Tr mrg.; x. 13; Lk. xviii. 15; pass. in Mt. xii. 22 [where L WH txt. act.]; xviii. 24 R GT; xix. 13; — one to a person who is to judge him: Lk. xxiii. 14; τινὰ ἐπὶ Tas συναγωγὰς καὶ Tas ἀρχάς, Lk. xii. 11 [W. § 52, 3] (where T Tr txt. WH εἰσφέρωσιν). προσφέρω τι, to bring or present a thing, Mt. xxv. 20; τί τινι, to reach or hand…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

προσφέρω, “bring to,” “‘ present,’’ is seen in P Fay 2117 (a.p. 134) τὰ βιβλία προσφέροντες o[t]s ὀφίλουσιν, ““ presenting their accounts to their creditors,” P Giss I. κοὐδ (a.p. 259) προσφέρων τῇ πόλει... δραχμὰς δεκαεπτὰ ὀβολόν, and P Meyer 23% (end iv/A.D.) παρὰ Τιθοῆτι τῷ προσφέροντί σοι ταῦτά pov τὰ γράμματα: cf. P Par 63!% (B.c. 164) (= P Petr IIL. p. 18) καλῶς ποιήσεις τὴν πᾶσαν προσενεγκάμενος ἐκτένειαν, ‘“‘you will do well in using every effort” (Mahaffy), and P Tebt I. 3318 (B.c. 112) (=Se/ections, p- 31) τὴν πᾶσαν προσενέγκαι σπουδήν. The force seen in Heb 127 appears in P Par 4659 (8.6. 152) (= UPZ i. p. 338) where Apollonius appeals to his brother Ptolemaeus to examine personally into his grievance against a third party—vopitw γὰρ μάλιστα τῶν ἄλλων παρακολουθήκοντά σε τῆι ἀληθείαι πικρότερον προσενεχθήσεσθ᾽ αὐτῶι, “‘when you have investigated the truth you will deal with…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

προσφέρω (prospherō) — to bring to.

προσφέρω

(once ποσφέρω, which see), Doric dialect ποτιφέρω Prov. cited in [Refs 1st c.AD+]: future

__A προσοίσω [Refs 5th c.BC+]: Ionic dialect aorist προσένεικα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: Ionic dialect aorist passive προσηνείχθην [Refs]:—bring to or upon, apply to, π. πύργοισι κλιμάκων προσαμβάσεις [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μηχανὰς [τοῖσι τείχεσι] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. νόμον, ψήφισμα πρὸς τὴν συγγραφήν bring to bear against.., [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but χέρα τινὶ προσενεγκεῖν lay hands upon.. , [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. τὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῖς, in hostile sense, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] (but also in a friendly relation, [Refs 5th c.BC+] {προσφεύγω}, and in supplication to the gods, hold out one's hands to, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; ἀνάγκην or ἀναγκαίην τισὶ π. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so of surgical or medical treatment, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πταρμὸν [τῇ λυγγί] [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

προσφέρω

prosphero

from 4314 and 5342 (including its alternate); to bear towards, i.e.

lead to, tender (especially to God), treat:--bring (to, unto), deal

with, do, offer (unto, up), present unto, put to.

see GREEK for 4314

see GREEK for 5342

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

προσφέρω

v.

I bring to, offer

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

προσφέρω prospherō 47x

to bear or bring to, Mt. 4:24; 25:20; to bring to or before magistrates, Lk. 12:11; 23:14; to bring near to, apply to, Jn. 19:29; to offer, tender, proffer, as money, Acts 8:18; to offer, present, as gifts, oblations, etc., Mt. 2:11; 5:23; Heb. 5:7; to offer in sacrifice, Mk. 1:44; Lk. 5:14; to offer up any one as a sacrifice to God, Heb. 9:25, 28; 11:17; mid. to bear one’s…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

προσφέρω doric ποτι-φέρω fut. προσοίσω ionic aor. pass. -ενείχθην to bring to or upon, apply to, Lat. applicare, Hdt., Eur., etc.; but, πρ. χεῖρά τινι to lay hands upon one, Pind.; also to offer one's hand, as a friend, Xen.:—without dat. to apply, exhibit, employ, use, βίην Hdt.; πρ. τόλμαν to bring it to bear, Pind.: also, πρ. πόλεμον Hdt.

to add, τί τινι Soph., Eur.; τι πρός τι Hdt.

to present, offer, give, λουτρὰ πατρί Soph.; δῶρα Thuc.; θυσίας NTest.

esp. of meat and drink, to offer, to set before one, Xen.; πρ. τινὶ ἐμπιεῖν καὶ φαγεῖν id. Xen.

to bring forward, quote, cite, Pind.

to bring forward proposals, make an offer, πρ. λόγον or λόγους τινι Hdt., Thuc.: absol., πρ. περὶ ὁμολογίας Hdt., Thuc.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAI-3S — Verb · aorist · active · indicative · third person · singular
aorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
10%offered
offered10% · 5×they brought8% · 4×do offer8% · 4×he may offer6% · 3×offering6% · 3×they were bringing6% · 3×brought6% · 3×offer4% · 2×other renderings44% · 21×

48 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 29 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb98%object2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 46 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
ἱερεύςa priestΣυρίαSyriaἐκεῖνος
ὅς
ἕωςuntil, as far asοὗτοςαἷμαblood
αὐτός
θησαυρόςa treasure, storπρός
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
καίand, even, also,ἐξέρχομαιI go out, come o
τότεthen
προσφέρωoffered46×
what comes after →
αὐτός
πᾶςall, the whole, δαιμονίζομαιI am demon-posseArticle the
Article the
δῶρονa gift, presentθεόςGod, a godArticle the
περί
Article theἁμαρτίαa sin
ἐγώ
Article theἔτοςa year
ὑπέρ
εἷςoneἑαυτοῦ

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπροσφέρω · 46× in the New Testament
Hebrews Matthew Luke Acts Mark John
Across the New Testament6 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 109 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome The Didache
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 165c. AD 40

Τὰς δὲ γοητείας καὶ ἀπάτας αὑτῆς ἡδονὴ τῷ μὲν ἀνδρὶ οὐ τολμᾷ προσφέρειν, τῇ δὲ γυναικὶ καὶ διὰ ταύτης ἐκείνῳ, πάνυ προσφυῶς καὶ εὐθυβόλως·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.184c. AD 75–95

καὶ ὁ μὲν ταῦτʼ ἀκούσας θυσίαν προσφέρει τῷ θεῷ κελευσθεὶς ὑπʼ αὐτοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.7c. AD 100

λέγει δὲ πάλιν πρὸς αὐτούς: Μὴ ἐγὼ ἐνετειλάμην τοῖς πατράσιν ὑμῶν ἐκπορευομένοις ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, προσενέγκαι μοι ὁλοκαυτώματα καὶ θυσίας;

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. AD 2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 1st c. BC
P.Mich. 5 322 aTebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 46

τοῦ νῦν καὶ ταῖς προγεγραμμέναις ἑαυτοῦ θυγατράσι Ταμαρῆτι καὶ Θαυβάστι, τῇ μὲν Ταμαρῆτι ἃς προσενήνοχεν αὐτῇ ἔτι πάλαι ὁ αὐτὸς Ψύφις ὃς καὶ Ἁρποχρατίων, διʼ ἧς ἔθετο ἡ Ταμαρῆς

P.Fam.Tebt. 21Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 122

συνγραφὴν γάμου τελειωθεῖσαν διὰ τοῦ αὐτοῦ γραφείου τῷ ἐνάτῳ ἔτει θεοῦ Τραιανοῦ, μεθʼ ἃς προσήνεγκεν αὐτῇ κατὰ τὴν αὐτὴν συμβίωσιν φερνὴν ἀργυρίου δραχμὰς πεντακοσίας , ἁπάσας δραχμὰς χιλίας ἑκατὸν

P.Fay. 21Theadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 134

παρὰ ταῦτα ποιήσῃ. ἐπεὶ δὲ καὶ τοῦτό τινες ἐμέμψαντο ὡς αὐτοὶ μὲν τὰ βιβλία προσφέροντες οἷς ὀφείλουσιν, ἐκείνους δὲ μὴ βουλομένους παρʼ αὐτῶν λαμβάνειν ἵνα τὴν παρολκὴν ἐξωνήσωνται τῷ

how much more the blood <the> of Christ, who through [the] Spirit eternal Himself offered unblemished <the> to God, will purify the conscience of us from dead works in order <the> to serve God [the] living?
ἄμωμονamōmos unblemished G299 Adjective · accusative · singular · masculine
9× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Hebrews than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for blameless means being without fault or blemish, like Christ in Hebrews 9:14 and 1 Peter 1:19. It describes someone who is morally pure and faultless. This idea is also found in Ephesians 1:4 and 5:27.
Amplified meaning
without fault, blameless
Tyndale gloss
blameless
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἄμωμος (amomos) means 'blameless' or 'without blemish.' It is often used in a sacrificial context to describe victims that are unblemished, as well as ethically to refer to individuals who are faultless. The New Testament employs this term in relation to Christ's sinless life and in descriptions of believers' moral purity. It is synonymous with terms like ἀμίαντος and ἄσπιλος.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἄ-μωμος, -ον

(< μῶμος, q.v.),

[in LXX chiefly for תָּמִים];

of sacrificial victims, without blemish: of Christ, He 9:14, I Pe 1:19; ethically, unblemished, faultless: Eph 1:4 5:27, Phl 2:15, Col 1:22, Ju 24, Re 14:5 (Cremer, 425, 788; MM, VGT, s.v.).†

SYN.: ἀμίαντος, ἄσπιλος.

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἄμωμος, -ov, (μῶμος), without blemish, free from faultiness, as a victim without spot or blemish: 1 Pet. i. 19 (Lev. xxii. 21); Heb. ix. 14; in both places allusion is made to the sinless life of Christ. Ethically, without blemish, faultless, unblamable: Eph. i. 4; v. 27; Col. i. 22; Phil. ii. 15 LTTrWH; Jude 24; Rey. xiv. 5. (Often in Sept.; [Hesiod, Simon., Iambl.], Hdt. 2, 177; Aeschyl. Pers. 185; Theoer. 18, 25.) [Syn. see Trench § ciii.; Tittmann i. 29 sq.]

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἄμωμος. The word is found in a sepulchral epitaph from Thessalonica C/G 1974, also in the sepulchral poem referred to under apapavros—Sikvis σέλας αἰὲν ἄμωμον. Nageli(p. 25) " αν further cites the Paris magical papyrus, 1. 1311. For the use of "Apwpos as a proper name, see Fick-Bechtel Dee griechischen Personennamen, Ὁ. 213. Hort (on 1 Pet. 119) points out that the Biblical use of ἄμωμος, properly ‘‘ without blame,” was affected by the Hebrew D4 ‘*blemish,” for rendering which the LXX translators caught at the curiously similar μῶμος. ay. For the rapid decay of this particle in Hellenistic vernacular, reference may be made to Pro/eg. pp. 165-9, 197-201 : a few additional points may be brought in. First comes the use with relatives and conjunctions, normally but by no means universally taking the subjunctive. Here in i/ and ii/A.D. ἐάν greatly predominated over ἄν, except with ὅπως, ὡς…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἄμωμος (amōmos) — blameless.

ἄμωμος, ον,

blameless, [Refs 7th c.BC+]; without blemish, εἶδος ἄ.[Refs 8th c.BC+]

2. unblemished, of victims, etc., [LXX+NT+1st c.AD+]

3. unimpaired, perfect, ὑγίεια[Refs 4th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἄμωμος

amomos

from 1 (as a negative particle) and 3470; unblemished (literally or

figuratively):--without blame (blemish, fault, spot), faultless,

unblamable.

see GREEK for 1

see GREEK for 3470

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἄμωμος, ον

Adj

blameless

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἄμωμος without blame, blameless, Hdt., Aesch.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-ASM — Adjective · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-ASM Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
63%blameless
blameless63% · 5×unblemished25% · 2×without blemish13% · 1×

8 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
predicate44%second object33%adverbial11%object11%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 9 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
ἅγιοςset apart, holy,κιννάμωμονcinnamon
θεόςGod, a god
τέκνονa child, descend
προσφέρωI bring to, offer
ἑαυτοῦ
ἀμνόςa lamb
ὡςas, like as, how
αὐτός
δόξαhonor, renown, g
ἄμωμοςunblemished
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
ἀνέγκλητοςirreproachable, ἄσπιλοςunstained, undefθυμίαμαincense
κατενώπιονbefore the face of
αὐτός
μέσοςmiddle, in the middl
γενεάa generation
Article the
θεόςGod, a god
ἐν
ἀγαλλίασιςexultation, exhi

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἄμωμος · 9× in the New Testament
Ephesians Revelation 1 Peter Colossians Hebrews Jude Philippians
Across the New Testament7 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 60 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch Josephus Clement of Rome The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.50c. AD 40

ἐὰν μέντοι γε τὰ ἄμικτα καὶ σύγκλυδα εἰς ταὐτὸν ἄγῃς, χώριζε καὶ διάκρινε τῆς καθαρᾶς καὶ ἀμιάντου φύσεως τῆς ἀναφερούσης τὰ ἄμωμα τῷ θεῷ, αὕτη δέ ἐστι τὸ θυσιαστήριον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.279c. AD 75–95

καὶ διὰ ταύτην τὴν αἰτίαν οἱ τὴν ἱερατικὴν στολὴν φοροῦντες ἄμωμοί τέ εἰσι καὶ περὶ πάντα καθαροὶ καὶ νηφάλιοι, πίνειν οἶνον ἕως οὗ τὴν στολὴν ἔχουσι κεκωλυμένοι·

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 36.2c. AD 96

διὰ τούτου ἀτενίζομεν εἰς τὰ ὕψη τῶν οὐρανῶν, διὰ τούτου ἐνοπτριζόμεθα τὴν ἄμωμον καὶ ὑπερτάτην ὄψιν αὐτοῦ, διὰ τούτου ἠνεῴχθησαν ἡμῶν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ τῆς καρδίας, διὰ τούτου ἡ ἀσύνετος καὶ ἐσκοτωμένη διάνοια ἡμῶν ἀναθάλλει εἰς τὸ φῶς, διὰ τούτου…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 2nd c. AD 5th c. AD

1 Οὐαλερίαν Μάρκου θυγατέρα Ἰνγένουαν ἀπὸ Καισαρείας τῆς Μαυρειτανίας εὔνουν φιλόστοργον σεμνὴν ἄμωμον

PSI Congr. 11 12Koptos bzw. Oxyrhynchos (?)AD 201–AD 300

ἀσφάλτου Συριακῆς μνᾶ α … κρόκου μνα- δραχμαί … γιγγιδιου ἐξόχου ὀγκίαι δ … ἀμώμου ἐξόχου ὀγκίαι β

P.Coll.Youtie 2 86AD 201–AD 400

2 … λίτρ … ἀμώμου λίτραι β κόστου λίτρα α στύρακος λίτρα α δ μαστίχης λίτρα α δ θυμιαμάτων

how much more the blood <the> of Christ, who through [the] Spirit eternal Himself offered unblemished <the> to God, will purify the conscience of us from dead works in order <the> to serve God [the] living?
τῷho <the> G3588 Article · dative · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Hebrews as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-DSM — Article · dative · singular · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-DSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
<the>19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

how much more the blood <the> of Christ, who through [the] Spirit eternal Himself offered unblemished <the> to God, will purify the conscience of us from dead works in order <the> to serve God [the] living?
θεῷ,theos to God, G2316 Noun · dative · singular · masculine
1,311× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Hebrews as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word simply means God, referring to the one true deity. It is used throughout the New Testament, including in Matthew 27:46 and Acts 14:11, to describe the supreme being and creator of the universe.
Amplified meaning
the supreme Deity
Tyndale gloss
God
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

θεός (theos) means 'God' or 'a god' and is used in both singular and plural forms. It refers to the supreme deity in monotheistic contexts, as well as to lesser deities in polytheistic settings. The New Testament frequently employs this term, notably in verses like Matthew 27:46 and Acts 19:37. Some lexicons note its use as a title for rulers or magistrates, reflecting its broader application in ancient texts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

θεός, -οῦ, ὁ, ἡ (Ac 19:37 only; v. M, Pr., 60, 244), late voc., θεέ (Mt 27:46; cf. De 3:24, al.),

[in LXX chiefly for אֱלֹהִים, also for אֵל and other cognate forms, יהוה, etc.;]

a god or deity, God.

In polytheistic sense, a god or deity: Ac 28:6, I Co 8:4, II Th 2:4, al.; pl., Ac. 14:11 19:26, Ga 4:8, al.

Of the one true God;

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

θεός, -οὔ, ὁ and ἡ, voc. θεέ, once in the N. T., Mt. xxvii. 46; besides in Deut. iii. 24; Judg. [xvi. 28;] xxi. 3; [2 S. vii. 25; Is. xxxviii. 20]; Sir. xxiii. 4; Sap. ix. 1; 3 Mace. vi. 3; 4 Mace. vi. 27; Act. Thom. 44 sq. 57; Eus. h. 6. 2, 23,16; [5, 20,7; vit. Const. 2,55, 1.59]; ef. W. §8, 2 ο.; [B. 12 (11)]; ({on the eight or more proposed derivations see Vaniéek p. 386, who follows Curtius (after Doderlein) p. 513 sqq. in connecting it with a root meaning to supplicate, implore; hence the implored ; per contra cf. Max Miiller, Chips ete. iv. 227 sq.; L. and 8. s. v. fin.]); [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for 58, ΟΝ and m7; a god, a goddess; 1. a general appellation of deities or divinities: Acts xxviii. 6; 1 Co. viii. 4; 2 Th. ii. 4; once ἡ θεός, Acts xix. 37 G LT Tr WH; θεοῦ φωνὴ καὶ οὐκ ἀνθρώπου, Acts xii. 22; ἄνθρωπος ὧν ποιεῖς σεαυτὸν θεόν, Jn. x. 33; plur., of the gods of the…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

θεός. For the application of the title θεός to the Ptolemaic kings it is sufficient to recall Brit. Mus. Inscrr. IV. 1 No. 906% (B.C. 284-273) where a votive offering is dedicated in honour of Πτολεμαίου τοῦ σωτῆρος καὶ θεοῦ, and the description of Ptolemy V. (Epiphanes) on the Rosetta stone—OG/S gol? (B.C. 196) ὑπάρχων θεὸς ἐκ θεοῦ Kal θεᾶς : cf. Deissmann LAE, p. 348 and the full discussion by E. Kornemann ‘‘ Zur Geschichte der antiken Herrscherkulte” in Beztrdge zur alten Geschichte [Klio] i., p. 51 ff. (Leipzig, 1902). The same practice is still more strikingly illustrated in the Imperial period, as when in an inscr. from the Fayum district, dated March 17th, B.c. 24, Augustus is described as θεὸς ἐκ θεοῦ (OG/S 6557), or as when a votive inscr. is addressed to Nero—daya0a(t) θεῶ(ι) (Cos 927): see Deissmann 7s. p. 349. With this may be compared the frequent use for Augustus of the…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

θεός (theos) — God.

θεός, ὁ,

Boeotian dialect θιός, Laconian dialect σιός (see. below), [Refs 5th c.AD+], Cretan dialect θιός [Refs], Doric dialect also θεύς [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; vocative (only late) θεός, also θεέ [LXX+NT]; but classical in compound names, Ἀμφίθεε, Τιμόθεε:—God, the Deity, in general sense, both singular and plural (εἰ καὶ ἐπὶ θεοὺς καὶ ἔτι μᾶλλον ἐπὶ θεὸν ἁρμόζει μεταφέρειν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; σὺν θ. εἰρημένον [Refs 5th c.BC+]: so in plural, σύν γε θεοῖσιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐ θεῶν ἄτερ pi.[Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὑπὲρ θεόν against his will,[Refs 4th c.BC+]; θεῶν συνεθελόντων, βουλομένων, [Refs 5th c.BC+]bless you! good heavens! for heaven's sake! [Refs 8th c.BC+]: doubled in poets, θεὸν θεόν τις ἀγλαϊζέτω [Refs 5th c.BC+]; θεοί (Cretan dialect θιοί) as an opening formula in Inscrr. (i.e. τύχην ἀγαθὴν διδοῖεν), [Refs].1, etc.: in Prose also with the Article, ὁ θ.…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

θεός

theos

of uncertain affinity; a deity, especially (with 3588) the supreme

Divinity; figuratively, a magistrate; by Hebraism, very:--X exceeding,

God, god(-ly, -ward).

see GREEK for 3588

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

θεός, οῦ, ὁ

n.f. & n.m.

God, a god

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

θεός theos 1x

a deity, Acts 7:43; 1 Cor. 8:5; an idol, Acts 7:40; God, the true God, Mt. 3:9, et al. freq.; God, possessed of true godhead, Jn. 1:1; Rom. 9:5; from the Hebrew, applied to potentates, Jn. 10:34, 35; τῷ θεῷ, an intensive term, from the Hebrew, exceedingly, Acts 7:20, and, perhaps, 2 Cor. 10:4

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

θεός θεός, ὁ, God, Hom., both in general sense, Θεὸς δώσει God will grant, and in particular sense, θεός τις a god; πατὴρ ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε Hom.:—things are said to happen σὺν θεῷ, σύν γε θεοῖσιν by the will of God, id. Hom., etc.; οὐκ ἄνευ θεοῦ, Lat. non sine diis, Od.; οὐκ ἄνευθε θεοῦ Il.; οὐ θεῶν ἄτερ Pind.;— ἐκ θεόφι Il.;— ὑπὲρ θεόν against his will, id. Il.;— κατὰ θεόν τινα, Lat. divinitus, Eur.:—as an oath, πρὸς θεῶν by the gods, in God's name, Trag.; θεὸς ἴστω Soph., etc.

θεός as fem. for θεά, θέαινα, a goddess, Hom.; θήλεια θεός Il.; ἡ νερτέρα θ. Proserpine, Soph.; often in oaths, νὴ τὼ θεώ id. Soph.; ναὶ τὼ σιώ, with the Spartans, of Castor and Pollux, Xen.; with the Boeotians, of Amphion and Zethus, id.…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-DSM — Noun · dative · singular · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-DSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

god ('Elohim, 'El, [`Elyon], Shadday, Yahweh; Theos):

I. INTRODUCTION TO THE GENERAL IDEA

1. The Idea in Experience and in Thought

2. Definition of the Idea

3. The Knowledge of God

4. Ethnic Ideas of God

(1) Animism

(2) Fetishism

(3) Idolatry

(4) Polytheism

(5) Henotheism

(6) Pantheism

(7) Deism

(8) Semitic Monolatry

(9) Monotheism

II. THE IDEA OF GOD IN THE OLD TESTAMENT

1. The Course of Its Development

2. Forms of Its Manifestation

(1) The Face or Countenance of God

(2) The Voice and Word of God

(3) The Glory of God

(4) The Angel of God

(5) The Spirit of God

(6) The Name of God

(7) Occasional Forms

3. The Names of God

(1) Generic

(2) Attributive

(3) Yahweh

4. Pre-prophetic Conceptions of God

(1) Yahweh Alone Is the God of Israel

(a) His Early Worship

(b) Popular Religion

(c) Polytheistic Tendencies

(i) Coordination

(ii) Assimilation

(iii) Disintegration

(d) No Hebrew Goddesses

(e) Human Sacrifices

Easton's Bible Dictionary

God

(A.S. and Dutch God; Dan. Gud; Ger. Gott), the name of the Divine Being. It is the rendering (1) of the Hebrew ’El, from a word meaning to be strong; (2) of ’Eloah_, plural _’Elohim. The singular form, Eloah, is used only in poetry. The plural form is more commonly used in all parts of the Bible, The Hebrew word Jehovah (q.v.), the only other word generally employed to denote the Supreme Being, is uniformly rendered in the Authorized Version by “LORD,” printed in small capitals. The existence of God is taken for granted in the Bible. There is nowhere any argument to prove it. He who disbelieves this truth is spoken of as one devoid of understanding (Ps. 14:1).

The arguments generally adduced by theologians in proof of the being of God are:

(1.) The a priori argument, which is the testimony afforded by reason.

Smith's Bible Dictionary

(good). Throughout the Hebrew Scriptures two chief names are used for the one true divine Being--ELOHIM, commonly translated God in our version, and JEHOVAH, translated Lord . Elohim is the plural of Eloah (in Arabic Allah); it is often used in the short form EL (a word signifying strength , as in EL-SHADDAI, God Almighty, the name by which God was specially known to the patriarchs. (Genesis 17:1; 28:3; Exodus 6:3) The etymology is uncertain, but it is generally agreed that the primary idea is that of strength, power of effect , and that it properly describes God in that character in which he is exhibited to all men in his works, as the creator, sustainer and supreme governor of the world. The plural form of Elohim has given rise to much discussion. The fanciful idea that it…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

This name, the derivation of which is uncertain, we give to that eternal, infinite, perfect, and incomprehensible Being, the Creator of all things, who preserves and governs all by his almighty power and wisdom, and is the only proper object of worship. The proper Hebrew name for God is JEHOVAH, which signifies He is. But the Jews, from a feeling of reverence, avoid pronouncing this name, substituting for it, wherever it occurs in the sacred test, the word ADONAI, Lord; except in the expression, ADONAI JEHOVAH, Lord Jehovah, for which they put, ADONAI ELOHIM, Lord God. This usage, which is not without an element of superstition, is very ancient, dating its origin some centuries before Christ; but there is no good ground for assuming its existence in the days of the inspired Old Testament writers. The proper word for God is ELOHIM, which is plural in its form, being thus used to signify…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
96%god
god96% · 1289×other renderings3% · 34×other renderings1% · 19×

1,342 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 14 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject31%adverbial26%object24%predicate12%indirect object5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,311 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
βασιλείαkingship, sovereλόγοςa word, speech, υἱόςa son, descenden
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theπαράδικαιοσύνηjustice, justnes
ἀπό
εἰρήνηpeace, peace of ὅτιthat, since, becἐγώ
καίand, even, also, nam
ἈβραάμPropἸσαάκPropΧριστόςanointed, the Me
εἰμίI am, exist
οὐNegυἱόςa son, descendenοὗτος
θεόςto God,1311×
what comes after →
Article the
δίδωμιI offer, giveπαντοκράτωρruler of the uniπατήρfather, Father,
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theπατήρfather, Father, αὐτός
ἐγώ
καίand, even, also,Article theἐκβάλλωI throw, cast, p
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςΧριστόςanointed, the Me
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theκαίand, even, also,εἰς

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceθεός · 1,311× in the New Testament
Acts Romans Luke 1 Corinthians Revelation John 2 Corinthians Hebrews 1 John Matthew Mark 1 Peter

15 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 1,637 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 7c. AD 40

Τινὲς γὰρ τὸν κόσμον μᾶλλον ἢ τὸν κοσμοποιὸν θαυμάσαντες τὸν μὲν ἀγένητόν τε καὶ ἀίδιον ἀπεφήναντο, τοῦ δὲ θεοῦ πολλὴν ἀπραξίαν ἀνάγνως κατεψεύσαντο, δέον ἔμπαλιν τοῦ μὲν τὰς δυνάμεις ὡς ποιητοῦ καὶ πατρὸς καταπλαγῆναι, τὸν δὲ μὴ πλέον ἀποσεμνῦναι…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὡς πύργος, ὃν οἱ παῖδες αὐτοῦ ἐφ' ὕβρει τοῦ θεοῦ ᾠκοδόμησαν, καὶ ὡς τὰς φωνὰς αὐτῶν μετέβαλε καὶ ὁ τόπος, ἐν ᾧ τοῦτο γέγονε, Βαβυλὼν ἐκλήθη.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 2nd c. AD 7th c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Grenf. 2 33Pathyris101 BC

αὐτῷ μέρος ἧς ἐμισθώσατο σὺν Πακοίβι Σχώτου καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων , τεσσάρων εἰς

P.Adl. 20Poinkoris (Diopolites)99 BC

1 βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ καὶ Ἀλεξάνδρου θεοῦ Φιλομήτορος καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεᾶς Φιλαδέλφου ἔτους ἑκκαιδεκάτου ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ

Chrest.Wilck. 12Pathyris89 BC

ἡμῖν Φιλόξενος ὁ ἀδελφὸς διʼ ὧν κεκόμικεν ἡμῖν Ὄρσης γραμμάτων περὶ τοῦ τὸν μέγιστον Θεὸν Σωτῆρα βασιλέα ἐπιβεβληκέναι εἰς Μέμφιν, Ἱέρακα δὲ προκεχειρίσθαι μετὰ δυνάμεων μυρίων ἐπὶ καταστολὴν τῆς

how much more the blood <the> of Christ, who through [the] Spirit eternal Himself offered unblemished <the> to God, will purify the conscience of us from dead works in order <the> to serve God [the] living?
καθαριεῖkatharizō will purify G2511 Verb · future · active · indicative · third person · singular
31× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Hebrews than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To clean or cleanse something, like when Jesus healed a leper in Matthew 8:3. It can also mean to purify or make something clean morally.
Amplified meaning
cleanse, make pure
Tyndale gloss
to clean
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word καθαρίζω (katharizō) means to cleanse or make clean, both in a physical and ethical sense. It is used in the New Testament to describe the cleansing of leprosy, as well as the purification from sin and moral defilement. The word can also refer to ceremonial cleansing, indicating its broad application in various contexts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

† καθαρίζω

(Hellenistic-FlJ, Inscr.-for Attic καθαίρω, q.v., on the vulgar -ερ-, Mt 8:3, Mk 1:42, v. Bl., § 6, 1; Thackeray, Gr., 74),

[in LXX chiefly for טָהֵר;]

to cleanse, make clean.

In physical sense: c. acc. rei, fig., Mt 23:25, 26, Lk 11:39; of disease (leprosy), c. acc. pers., Mt 8:2, 3 10:8 11:5, Mk 1:40-42, Lk 4:27 5:12, 13 7:22 17:14, 17; ἡ λέπρα ἐκαθερίσθη (on the spelling v. supr.), Mt 8:3.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καθαρίζω (Hellenistic for καθαίρω, which classic writ. use); Attic fut. [ef. B.37 (382); W. § 13, 1e.; WH. App. p: 163] καθαριῶ (Heb. ix. 14); 1 aor. ἐκαθάρισα [see below]; pres. pass. καθαρίζομαι; 1 aor. pass. ἐκαθαρίσθην ; pf. pass. ptep. κεκαθαρισμένος (Heb. x. 2 T Tr WH; on the forms ἐκαθερίσθη, T WII in Mt. viii. 3; Mk. i. 42, [ἐκαθέρισεν, Trin Acts x.15; xi. 9] and κεκαθερισμένος Lehm. in Heb. x. 2, ef. [Tdf. Proleg. p. 82; WH. App. p- 1507; Sturz, De dial. Maced. ete. p. 118; Delitzsch on Heb. x. 2; Kriiger Pt. ii. § 2, 2,6 p.4; [B. 29 (25sq.); W. 43]); (καθαρός) ; Sept. mostly for 7 ; 1. to make clean, to cleanse ; a. from physical stains and dirt: e.g. utensils, Mt. xxiii. 25, [fig. 26]; Lk. xi. 39; food, Mk. vii. 19; τινά, a leper, to cleanse by curing, Mt. viii. 2 sq-; X-8; xi.5; Mk. i. 40-42; Lk. iv. 27; v. 12sq.; vii. 22; xvii. 14, 17, (Lev. xiv.8) ; to remove by cleansing…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

καθαρίζω. The ceremonial usage of this Hellenistic verb is illustrated by Deissmann BS p. 216 f., where reference is made to the Mystery inscription of Andania, Sy?/ 653°? (B.C. 93 or 91) ἀναγραψάντω δὲ καὶ ἀφ᾽ ὧν Set καθαρίζειν καὶ ἃ μὴ δεῖ ἔχοντας εἰσπορεύεσθαι, and to 26. 633% (ii/A.D.) already cited s.v. ἀκάθαρτος sb /iz., both of which show the construction with ἀπό ase.g. in 2Cor 71, Heb 914. The word is used in connexion with plants in P Lond 131 γερο (accounts—A.D. 78-9) (=I. p. 175) καθαρίζ(ων) [τῶν] νεοφύτ(ων) τοῦ χωί(ρίου) τὰ περισσ(ὰ) βλαστήματα, and 76. 131 +83 (A.D. 78) (=I. p. 191): see also P Strass I. 2! (A.D. 217) τοῦ σοῦ καθαρίζοντος καὶ μετροῦντος with reference to the “cleansing” of wheat, and P Lips I. 1117? (iv/a.D.) καθαρίcopev Td γεώργι[ο]ν. In the iv/v Α.Ὁ. BGU IV. 10243": 16 we have νὴ yap Ala, ἣν τὰ κοσμήματα τὰ τῶν νόμων, ἣν ὑπὸ τῆς πόλ[ε]ως ἣν δεδομένα τῶι…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καθαρίζω (katharizō) — to clean.

κᾰθαρ-ίζω,

future -ιῶ[NT]:—cleanse, θυσιαστήριον [LXX+NT]; sift grain, [Refs 3rd c.AD+]; prune away, περισσὰ βλαστήματα [Refs 1st c.AD+]; clear ground of weeds, etc., [Refs 4th c.AD+]; keep a precinct clear, ἀπό τινων [Refs 1st c.BC+] —in middle, future -ιοῦμαι, of the menses, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. of persons, purify, ἀπὸ ἁμαρτίας [LXX+NT]; cleanse from leprosy, [NT]passive, -ιζέστω ἀπὸ γυναικός κτλ. [Refs]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

καθαρίζω

katharizo

from 2513; to cleanse (literally or figuratively):--(make) clean(-se),

purge, purify.

see GREEK for 2513

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καθαρίζω

v.

I make clean

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καθαρίζω katharizō 31x

to cleanse, render pure, purify, Mt. 23:25; Lk. 11:39; to cleanse from leprosy, Mt. 8:2, 3; 10:8; met. to cleanse from sin, purify by an expiatory offering, make expiation for, Heb. 9:22, 23; 1 Jn. 1:7; to cleanse from sin, free from the influence of error and sin, Acts 15:9; 2 Cor. 7:1; to pronounce ceremonially clean, Acts 10:15; 11:9

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

καθαρίζω fut. attic ιῶ καθαρός to make clean, to cleanse, NTest.:—Pass. to be or become clean from disease, id. NTest.; and of the disease, to be purged away, id. NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-FAI-3S-ATT — Verb · future · active · indicative · third person · singular
future active indicative — an action still to come.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-FAI-3S-ATT Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Future Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular ATTic

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
13%cleansed
cleansed13% · 4×do cleanse10% · 3×cleanse10% · 3×do be cleansed10% · 3×has cleansed6% · 2×you cleanse6% · 2×having purified3% · 1×we may cleanse3% · 1×other renderings39% · 12×

31 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 20 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 31 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ἐγώ
δύναμαιI am powerful, a
θέλωI will, wish, desire
λέγωI say, speakαὐτός
λεπρόςa leper
περιπατέωI walk, conduct ἐγείρωI wake, arouse,
καίand, even, also, nam
λέπραleprosyἀνομίαlawlessness, iniἁμαρτίαa sin
αὐτός
οὐδείςno one, none, noὑπάγωI go away, deparυἱόςa son, descenden
καθαρίζωwill purify31×
what comes after →
Article the
δέbut, on the otheἔξωθενfrom without, ouκαρδίαthe heart, inner
καίand, even, also, nam
εὐθέωςimmediately, sooκωφόςdumb, deaf
αὐτός
Article theδέbut, on the othe
σύ
μήNeg
ἑαυτοῦ
ἀπόλαόςa people, the cr

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαθαρίζω · 31× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Hebrews Mark Acts 1 John 2 Corinthians Ephesians James Titus
Across the New Testament10 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 79 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
The Shepherd of Hermas Josephus Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 10.70c. AD 75–95

καὶ καθαρίσας οὕτω τὴν χώραν ἅπασαν εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα τὸν λαὸν συνεκάλεσε κἀκεῖ τὴν ἀζύμων ἑορτὴν καὶ τὴν πάσχα λεγομένην ἤγαγεν·

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 16.10c. AD 96

καὶ κύριος βούλεται καθαρίσαι αὐτὸν τῆς πληγῆς.

The Shepherd of HermasThe Shepherd of Hermas 3.9.8c. AD 140

ἐνεσκιρωμένοι ἐστὲ καὶ οὐ θέλετε καθαρίσαι τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν καὶ συνκεράσαι ὑμῶν τὴν φρόνησιν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ ἐν καθαρᾷ καρδίᾳ, ἵνα σχῆτε ἔλεος παρὰ τοῦ βασιλέως τοῦ μεγάλου.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 7th c. AD
O.Stras. 1 677Ta Memnoneia (Theben) oder HermonthisAD 101–AD 200

τὰς κληματίδας ἐξ πεντωβόλου … ιβ παῖδες α ἐπιτεῖναι μοσχάλεια … ιγ ἄνδρες α καθαρίζει τοὺς μῆλας ἐξ

P.Köln 3 163AD 201–AD 300

δήλωσόν μοι ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ περὶ τοῦ ἰτεῶνος τοῦ ταβουλαρίου. πρὸς τὸν περυσινὸν συνεφώνησα καθαρίσαι αὐτὸ δραχμῶν ιϛ. ἔστιν δὲ Σαραπίων γεωργὸς ταβουλαρίου ἵνα σοῦ ἐξελθόντος πρὸς αὐτὸν ἔχῃς

PSI 4 316OxyrhynchosAD 328

ἀπὸ ο … … ἐν τόπῳ Ψύλλου λεγομένου ἀρούρας ὅσας ἐὰν ὦσιν, ὥστε με καθαρίσαι θρυοκοπῆσαι δαμάσαι ἀπὸ πάσης δείσης καὶ θρύων καὶ σπεῖραι τὰς πάσας ἐν οἷς ἐὰν

how much more the blood <the> of Christ, who through [the] Spirit eternal Himself offered unblemished <the> to God, will purify the conscience of us from dead works in order <the> to serve God [the] living?
τὴνho the G3588 Article · accusative · singular · feminine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Hebrews as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-ASF — Article · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-ASF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

how much more the blood <the> of Christ, who through [the] Spirit eternal Himself offered unblemished <the> to God, will purify the conscience of us from dead works in order <the> to serve God [the] living?
συνείδησινsuneidēsis conscience G4893 Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
31× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Hebrews than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Conscience is a moral awareness that guides our actions, as seen in Romans 2:15 and 1 Corinthians 10:29. It's an inner sense of right and wrong. The Bible often mentions a clear or weak conscience.
Amplified meaning
moral awareness
Tyndale gloss
conscience
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

συνείδησις (suneidēsis) refers to consciousness and conscience, derived from the root meaning 'joint knowledge.' It encompasses self-awareness, moral discernment, and the inner sense of right and wrong. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, including ethical discussions in Romans and 1 Corinthians. The lexicons note its philosophical depth, particularly in Pauline writings, suggesting a unique connotation distinct from earlier uses.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

συν-είδησις, -εως, ἡ

(< συνεῖδον),

[in LXX: Ec 10:20 (מַדָּע), Wi 17:11, Si 42:18 א * ;]

consciousness: c. gen. obj., He 10:2, I Pe 2:19.

In ethical sense, innate discernment, self-judging consciousness, conscience (Stoics and late writers): Ro 2:15 9:1, I Co 10:29, II Co 1:12 4:2 5:11, I Ti 4:2, He 9:14; σ. ἀγαθή, Ac 23:1, I Ti 1:5, 19, I Pe 3:16, 21; ἀσθενής, I Co 8:7, 10; ἀσθενοῦσα…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

συν-είδησις, -ews, 7, (συνεῖδον), Lat. conscientia, [lit. ‘joint-knowledge’; see σύν, II. 4], 1. 6. a. the consciousness of anything: with a gen of the obj., τῶν ἅμαρτιῶν, a soul conscious of sins, Heb. x. 2 (rod μύσους, Diod. 4, 65; συνείδησις εὐγενής, consciousness of nobility; a soul mindful of its noble origin, Hdian. 7, 1, 8 [3 ed. Bekk.]). b. the soul as distinguishing between what is morally good and bad, prompting to do the former and shun the latler, commending the one, condemning the other ; conscience: with a gen. of the subj., ἡ o. τινος, Ro. ii. 15 (where the idea of ἡ συνείδησις is further explained by καὶ μεταξὺ... ἢ καὶ ἀπολογουμένων [ef. W. 580 (539); see ἀπολογέομαι, 2, and συμμαρτυρέω]); Ro. ix. 1; 1 Co. viii. 7 [0 W. § 30, 1 a.], 10,12; x. 29; 2Co.i. 12; iv. 2; v. 11; Heb. ix. 14 (ἡ τοῦ φαύλου συνείδησις, Philo, fragm., vol. ii. p. 659 ed. Mangey [vi. p. 217 sq. ed.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

συνείδησις, (1) lit. “‘co-knowledge,’’ hence ‘‘consciousness’’: P Par Ρ. 422? (ii/A.D.) ὅταν ἰσελθῇς, καλῇ ὥρᾳ, εὑρήσις συνίδησιν, “lorsque tu seras entré, ἃ la bonne heure, tu trouveras les gens au courant de la chose(?)’’ (Ed.), P Ryl II. 116° (A.D. 194) θλειβομένη τῇ συνειδήσει περὶ ὧν ἐνοσφίσατο ἔν τε ἐνδομενείᾳ καὶ ἀποθέτοις, ‘‘oppressed by the consciousness of what she had appropriated both of the furniture and stored articles ’’ (Edd.), P Flor III. 3381? (iii/A.D.) οἶδα yap ὅτι συψειδήσι (‘“‘coscenziosamente,’’ Ed.) σπουδάζεις ἐμοί, P Oxy I, 1231} (iii/iv A.D.) ἤδη γὰρ οἱ τῶν ἄλλων πόλεων συνείδησιν εἰσήνεγκαν τοῖς κολλήγαις αὐτῶν, εἰσῆλθαν, “already the notaries of the other towns have acquainted their colleagues, and they have come in”’ (Edd.), BGU IV. 1024 41-7 (iv/A.D.) τὴν συνείδησιν τ[ῶν πεπραγμένων (?) . ., and P Par 211° (A.D. 616) ὁμολογοῦμεν γνώμῃ ἑκουσίᾳ καὶ αὐθαιρέτῳ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

συνείδησις (suneidēsis) — conscience.

συνείδησις, εως, ἡ,

knowledge shared with another, τῶν ἀλγημάτων (in a midwife) [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

2. communication, information, εὑρήσεις σ. [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; σ. εἰσήνεγκαν τοῖς κολλήγαις αὐτῶν [Refs 3rd c.AD+]

3. knowledge, λῦε ταῦτα πάντα μὴ διαλείψας ἀγαθῇ σ. (variant{ἀγαθῇ τύχῃ}) [Refs 5th c.BC+]

4. consciousness, awareness, [τῆς αὑτοῦ συστάσεως] [NT+5th c.BC+]; inner consciousness, ἐν σ. σου βασιλέα μὴ καταράσῃ [LXX+NT]

5. consciousness of right or wrong doing, conscience, Periander and [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἐὰν ἐγκλήματός τινος ἔχῃ σ. [Refs] (a) ii 19; βροτοῖς ἅπασιν ἡ σ. θεός [NT+4th c.BC+]; ἀπρόσκοπος πρὸς τὸν θεόν[NT+2nd c.AD+]; κολαζομένους κατὰ συνείδησιν [Refs…

Read the full entry →
Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

συνείδησις, εως, ἡ

n.f.

the conscience

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

συνείδησις syneidēsis 30x

consciousness, Heb. 10:2; a present idea, persisting notion, impression of reality, 1 Pet. 2:19; conscience, as an inward moral impression of one’s actions and principles, Acts 23:1; 24:16; Rom. 9:1; 2 Cor. 1:12; conscience, as the inward faculty of moral judgment, Rom. 2:15; 13:5; 1 Cor. 8:7b, 10, 12; 10:25, 27, 28, 29; 2 Cor. 4:2; 5:11; 1 Tim. 1:5, 19; 3:9; 4:2; Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

συνείδησις συνείδησις, εως, from συνειδέναι inf. of σύνοιδα self-consciousness: conscience, NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASF — Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

kon'-shens (he suneidesis):

I. SEQUENT CONSCIENCE

1. Judicial

2. Punitive

3. Predictive

4. Social

II. ANTECEDENT CONSCIENCE

III. INTUITIONAL AND ASSOCIATIONAL THEORIES

IV. THE EDUCATION OF CONSCIENCE

V. HISTORY AND LITERATURE

1. Earlier Views

2. Reformation and After

I. Sequent Conscience.

The aspect of conscience earliest noticed in literature and most frequently referred to at all times is what is called the Sequent Conscience--that is to say, it follows action.

1. Judicial:

This is judicial. No sooner is a decision formed than there ensues a judgment favorable or adverse, a sentence of guilty or not guilty. Conscience has often been compared to a court of law, in which there are culprit, judge, witnesses and jury; but these are all in the subject's own breast, and are in fact himself.

2. Punitive:

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Conscience

That faculty of the mind, or inborn sense of right and wrong, by which we judge of the moral character of human conduct. It is common to all men. Like all our other faculties, it has been perverted by the Fall (John 16:2; Acts 26:9; Rom. 2:15). It is spoken of as “defiled” (Titus 1:15), and “seared” (1 Tim. 4:2). A “conscience void of offence” is to be sought and cultivated (Acts 24:16; Rom. 9:1; 2 Cor. 1:12;

Is that faculty common to all free moral agents, Ro 2:13-15, in virtue of which we discern between right and wrong, and are prompted to choose the former and refuse the latter. Its appointed sphere is in the regulation, according to the will of God revealed in nature and the Bible, of all our being and actions so far as these have a moral character. The existence of this faculty proves the soul accountable at the bar of its Creator, and its voice is in an important sense the voice of God. We feel that when pure and fully informed, it is an unerring guide to duty, and that no possible array of inducements can justify us in disregarding it. In man, however, though this conviction that we must do what is right never fails, yet the value of conscience is greatly impaired by its inhering in a depraved soul, whose evil tendencies warp and…

Nave's Topical Bible

→ General scriptures concerning Job 15:21,24; 27:6; Pr 20:12; Mt 5:15,16; 6:22,23; Lu 11:33-36; Ac 23:1; 24:16; Ro 2:14,15; 7:15-22,23; 9:1; 14:1-23; 1Co 8:7-13; 10:32; 2Co 1:12; 4:2; 5:11; 1Ti 1:5,19; 3:9; Heb 9:14; 10:22; 13:18; 1Pe 2:19; 3:16,21; 1Jo 3:20,21

→ FAITHFUL

INSTANCES OF

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
90%conscience
conscience90% · 28×conscience?3% · 1×consciences3% · 1×a conscience3% · 1×

31 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial48%object26%subject19%predicate7%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 31 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
διάκαίand, even, also,αὐτός
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
ἐγώπρός
καθαρόςclean, pure, unstain
ἐν
ἀπρόσκοποςnot offending, not c
ἀσκέωI train, practic
ἄλλοςother, another, diff
ὑπό
συνείδησιςconscience31×
what comes after →
ἀγαθόςgood
πολιτεύομαιI live the life καίand, even, also,ἐπερώτημαinquiry, request
ἔχωI have, hold, posses
πρόςἐνἀγαθόςgood
ἐγώ
ἐνὅτιthat, since, becἀπό
αὐτός
ἀσθενήςweak, infirm, si
ἐλέγχωI rebuke, expose
ἐξέρχομαιI go out, come o

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσυνείδησις · 31× in the New Testament
1 Corinthians Hebrews 1 Timothy 1 Peter 2 Corinthians Romans Acts 2 Timothy John Titus
Across the New Testament10 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Clement of Rome Josephus Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch Polycarp
Philo of AlexandriaThat the Worse Attacks the Better 146c. AD 40

ἱκετεύωμεν οὖν τὸν θεὸν οἱ συνειδήσει τῶν οἰκείων ἀδικημάτων ἐλεγχόμενοι, κολάσαι μᾶλλον ἡμᾶς ἢ παρεῖναι·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 16.103c. AD 75–95

οὐ μὴν ὅ γε Καῖσαρ ἐπιβλέπων αὐτοὺς ὡς εἶχον ἀσύνετον ἐποιεῖτο τὸ μὴ κατὰ συνείδησιν ἀτοπωτέραν, ἀλλʼ ἐξ ἀπειρίας καὶ μετριότητος ὀκνεῖν, ἐλεεινοί τʼ ἐγεγόνεισαν τοῖς παροῦσιν ἰδίᾳ καὶ τὸν πατέρα διεκίνησαν ἀληθινῷ τῷ πάθει συνεχόμενον.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 19.12c. AD 100

οὐ προσήξεις ἐπὶ προσευχὴν ἐν συνειδήσει πονηρᾷ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 2nd c. AD 7th c. AD 4th c. AD 5th c. AD
P.Fouad 1 28OxyrhynchosAD 59

ἀντικνήμιον, ἐξ οὗ ἔκτοτε κατακλινὴς ἐγενόμην, τῷ ζῆν κινδυνεύων. τοῦ δὲ δούλου φυγόντος κατὰ συνείδησιν ἧς πεποίηται ἐπηρείας, παρακατασχὼν τὸν ὄνον ἐνέκλισα εἰς τὴν ἐμαυτοῦ οἰκίαν. ἐκ τοῦ τοιούτου

P.Mil.Vogl. 1 27Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 129

καὶ σὺ ὁ κύριος, ἐντευχθεὶς ὑφʼ ἡμῶν διʼ ἑτέρου ἀναφορίου ὅτι ἐνθάδε οὖσα, ὑπὸ συνειδήσεως θλιβομένη ἀνέφυγεν εἰς τὸν Ἀρσινοείτην, ὅθεν καὶ ἔστιν, ἔγραψας τῷ τῆς Πολέμωνος μερίδος στρατηγῶι

P.Corn. 14Arsinoites (?)AD 180–AD 192

τῷ πράγματι ἕνεκα τοῦ τὸν διὰ τοῦ ἀναφορίου ἀντίδικον δηλωθέντα περιαλέσθαι. διὰ τὴν περισσὸν συνείδησιν ἀξιῶ, ἐάν σου τῇ τύχῃ δόξῃ, τῆς ἀπὸ σοῦ βοηθείας τυχεῖν. ἔστι δὲ τοῦ

how much more the blood <the> of Christ, who through [the] Spirit eternal Himself offered unblemished <the> to God, will purify the conscience of us from dead works in order <the> to serve God [the] living?
ἡμῶνsu of us G3165 Personal pronoun · second person · genitive · plural
2,041× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
In plain English
Tyndale gloss
you
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐγώ, gen, etc., ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ (enclitic μου, μοι, με), pl. ἡμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς,

pers. pron.

I.

The nom. is usually emphatic, when expressed as subjc, as in Mt 3:11, Mk 1:8, Lk 3:16, al. But often there is no apparent emphasis, as Mt 10:16, Jo 10:17; ἰδοὺ ἐ. (= Heb. הִנֵּנִי, cf. I Ki 3:8), Ac 9:10; ἐ. (like Heb. אֲנִי), I am, Jo 1:23 (LXX), Ac 7:32 (LXX).

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐγώ, gen. ἐμοῦ, enclitic pod; dat. ἐμοί, enclitic μοί; acc. ἐμέ, enclitic μέ; plur. ἡμεῖς, ete.; personal pronoun, J. 1. The nominatives ἐγώ and ἡμεῖς, when joined to a verb, generally have force and emphasis, or indicate antithesis, as Mt. iii. 11; Mk.i. 8; Lk. iii. 16 (ἐγὼ pev... ὁ δέ); Mt. iii. 14 (ἐγὼ... ἔχω, καὶ σύν ; V. 22, 28, 39, and often; ἡμεῖς, contrasted with God, Mt. vi. 12; ἡμεῖς x. of Φαρισαῖοι, Mt. ix. 14; cf. W. § 22,6. But sometimes they are used where there is no emphasis or antithesis in them, as Mt. x. 16; Jn. x. 17; and in many edd. in Mk. i. 2; Lk. vii. 27; οἵ. B. §129, 12. ἰδοὺ ἐγώ, 1397, behold me, hereamT: Acts ix.10 (1S. iii. 8). ἐγώ, like 38, Jam: Jn. i. 23; Acts vii. 32, [ef. W.585 (544); B. 125 (109)]. 2. The enclitic (and monosyllabic) gen., dat., and ace. are connected with nouns, verbs, adverbs, but not with prepositions: ἔμπροσθέν pov, Jn. i. 15; ὀπίσω…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐγώ. Deissmann (ZAZ p. 134 ff.) has drawn attention to the parallels to the solemn use of the first personal pronoun in the Fourth Gospel that may be adduced from inscriptions and magical texts. Thus in an inscr. in honour of Isis from Ios, written in ii/iii A.p., the contents of which are preChristian, we find —Elows ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ τ[ύρανν]ος πάσης χόρας.. ἐγὼ νόμους ἀνθρώποις ἐθέμην . . ἐγώ εἰμι Kpdvov θυγάτηρ πρεσβυτάτη α΄. And similarly in the magical papyrus P Lond 4645 (iv/a.p.) (=I. p. 69) ἐγώ εἰμι ὃ ἀκέφαλος δαίμων . . ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ ἀλήθεια ὁ μεισῶν ἀδικήματα γείνεσθαι ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ α΄. With the construction of the phrase τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί ; in Jn 24 we may compare BGU IV. 1141°8 (n.c. 14) ἐδίδουν αὐτῷ διαστολὰς μηδὲν αὐτῶι καὶ ἐκείνωι εἶναι : for its meaning see Ε΄. C. Burkitt in 77:5 xiii. p- 594f., where it is rendered, ‘‘ What have I and thou to do with that ?” On the difficult…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

μέ (me) — me.

ἐγώ,

I: pronoun of the first person:—Epic dialect mostly ἐγών before vowels (so in Doric dialect, before consonants, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect ἱών [Refs 2nd c.AD+]:— strengthened ἔγωγε, I at least, for my part, indeed, for myself (more frequently in Attic dialect than in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: Doric dialect ἐγώνγα [Refs 7th c.BC+]: Boeotian dialect ἱώνγα [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἱώνει [Refs]; ἰώγα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: Laconian dialect and Tarentum dialect ἐγώνη, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

II. oblique cases from a different root, genitive ἐμοῦ, enclitic μο; Ionic dialect and Epic dialect ἐμέο, ἐμεῦ, μευ, also ἐμέθεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect ἔμεθεν [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect ἐμέος, ἐμεῦς, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect ἐμοῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+] — _dative_ ἐμοί, enclitic μοι (which may be compared with Sanskrit…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐγώ

me

a shorter (and probably originally) from of 1691; me:--I, me, my.

see GREEK for 1691

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐγώ egō 2x

I, gen., ἐμοῦ [μου], dat., ἐμοί [μοι], acc., ἐμέ [με]

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-2GP — Personal pronoun · second person · genitive · plural
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-2GP Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: second Case: Genitive Number: Plural

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

US, pronoun objective case of we.

Give us this day our daily bread.

Us , pron. [OE. us, AS. s; akin to OFries. & OS. s, D. ons, G. uns, Icel. & Sw. oss, Dan. os, Goth. uns, L. nos we, us, Gr. we, Skr. nas us. . Cf. Nostrum, Our.] The persons speaking, regarded as an object; ourselves; — the objective case of we. See We. “Tell us a tale.” Chaucer.

Give us this day our daily bread. Matt. vi. 11.

Us, pron. oblique case of we

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
35%us
us35% · 717×me32% · 644×mine20% · 402×we ourselves6% · 124×my2% · 45×other renderings5% · 97×

2,029 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 27 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

how much more the blood <the> of Christ, who through [the] Spirit eternal Himself offered unblemished <the> to God, will purify the conscience of us from dead works in order <the> to serve God [the] living?
ἀπὸapo from G575 Preposition
647× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Hebrews as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means moving away from something, like a place or a time. It's used in many parts of the Bible, like Matthew 5:29 and Luke 5:2, to show movement or separation. It can also mean because of something.
Tyndale gloss
away from
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀπό (transliterated as apo) is a preposition meaning 'from' or 'away from,' typically used with the genitive case. It covers a wide range of meanings, including separation, origin, and partitive sense, as well as indicating distance in time or place. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as indicating motion from a place or the source of something. The entries do not show significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀπό (on the freq. neglect of elision bef. vowels, v. Tdf., Pr., 94, WH, App., 146),

prep. c. gen. (WM, 462 ff.; on its relation to ἐκ, παρά, ὑπό, WM, 456 f.),

[in LXX for מִן, בְּ, לְ;]

from (i.e. from the exterior).

Of separation and cessation;

of motion from a place: Mt 5:29, 30 7:23, Lk 5:2 22:41, al.;

in partitive sense (M, Pr., 72, 102, 245; MM, s.v.; Bl., § 40, 2), Mt 9:16 27:21, Jo 21:10, Ac 5:2, al.; also after verbs of eating, etc.;

of alienation (cl. gen. of separation), after such verbs as λούω (Deiss., BS, 227), λύω, σώζω, παύω, etc.; ἀνάθεμα ἀ., Ro 9:3; ἀποθνήσκειν ἀ.,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀπό, [fr. Hom. down], preposition with the Genitive, (Lat. a, ab, abs, Germ. von, ab, weg, [ef. Eng. of, off ]), Jrom, signifying now Separation, now Origin. On its use in the N. T., in which the influence of the Hebr. 1 is traceable, cf. W. 364 sy. (342), 369 (346) sqq.; B. 321 (276) sqq. [On the neglect of elision before words beginning with a vowel see Τὰ Proleg. p. 94; cf. W. § 5,1a.; B. p.10sq.; WH. App. p. 146.] In order to avoid repetition we forbear to cite all the examples, but refer the reader to the several verbs followed by this preposition. ἀπό, then, is used I. of Separation; and 1. of local separation, after verbs of motion fr. a place, (of departing, fleeing, removing, expelling, throwing, etc., see αἴρω, ἀπέρχομαι, ἀποτινάσσω, ἀποχωρέω, ἀφίστημι, φεύγω. etc.) : ἀπεσπάσθη ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν, Lk. xxii.41; βάλε ἀπὸ σοῦ. Mt. ν. 29 sq.3 ἐκβάλω τὸ κάρφος ἀπὸ [LT Tr WH ἐκ] τοῦ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀπό. In this and the other prepositions cf very wide and general use we have not pretended to any fullness: they would afford abundant material for a fair-sized treatise. We only notice such special uses as we have remarked in our reading, and have therefore passed over most of the common and obvious uses. On ἀπό there are some illustrations in Prodeg. which may be recalled with some additions. There is the partitive use (pp. 102, 245), still current in MGr: so P Petr III. 11%° (B.c. 234) ddeloO[w] ἀπὸ τῶν ὑπαρχόντων μοι [σ]ωμάτων [ἐλ]εύθερα A. kal’A., 2d. 11. τα (1)> (= Selections p- 7) (iii/B.c.) ἀπὸ τούτου τὸ μὲν ἥμυσυ . . . τὸ δὲ λοιπόν κτλ. P Tebt II. 209013 (c. a.D. 50) ἀπολυσίμ[ο]υ ἀπὸ av8[pav πεντή]κοντα ‘one of the 50 exempted persons” (Edd.), P Iand 8° (ii/A.p.) διεπεμψάμην cor. . ἀϊπὸ τοῦ οἸΐνου Κ νίδια τρία, etc. To Kuhring’s scanty exx. (p. 37) for ἀπό of agent (cf. Proleg.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀπό (apo) — away from.

ἀπό,

Aeolic dialect, Thess., [Refs 7th c.BC+], etc.:—preposition usually with Gen. but see below [Refs 5th c.BC+] (Cf. Sanskrit

__A ápa, Latin ab, Umbr. ap-ehtre 'ab extra', Gothic af, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] af, cef, of, etc.) Orig. sense, from. [ᾰπο?~X: where ἀπο ¯ is found in Epic dialect before see or liquids (as ἀπὸ ἕθεν[Refs 8th c.BC+] was sometimes written in later texts,[Refs] — ᾱ for the sake of meter in _Epic dialect_ compounds, such as ἀπονέεσθαι.]

__A.I OF PLACE, the earliest, and in [Refs 8th c.BC+]

__A.I.1 of Motion, from, away from, ἐσσεύοντο νεῶν ἄπο καὶ κλισιάων[Refs 8th c.BC+]; pleonastic, ἀ. Τροίηθεν[LXX+8th c.BC+]; also ἀπ᾽ αἰῶνος νέος ὤλεο, implying departure from life, [Refs]; opposed to ἐξ, of relatively superficial motion, λαμβάνομεν οὔτε ἐκ τῆς γῆς οὐδέν, οὔτ᾽ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκιῶν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; similarly…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀπό

apo

a primary particle; "off," i.e. away (from something near), in various

senses (of place, time, or relation; literal or figurative):--(X

here-)after, ago, at, because of, before, by (the space of), for(-th),

from, in, (out) of, off, (up-)on(-ce), since, with. In composition (as

a prefix) it usually denotes separation, departure, cessation,

completion, reversal, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀπό

Prep.

from, away from

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀπό apo 646x

pr. forth, from, away from; hence, it variously signifies departure; distance of time or place; avoidance; riddance; derivation from a quarter, source, or material; origination from agency or instrumentality

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀπό from, away from. c. gen.

prep. c. gen. = Lat. ab, from.

OF PLACE:

of Motion, from, away from, Hom., etc.; of warriors fighting from chariots, Hom.

of Position, away from, far from, apart from, ἀπὸ ἧς ἀλόχοιο Il.; ἀπ᾽ ὀφθαλμῶν far from sight, id. Il.; ἀπὸ θαλάσσης Thuc., etc.

of the mind, ἀπὸ θυμοῦ away from, i. e. alien from, my heart, Il.; οὐκ ἀπὸ τρόπου not without reason, Plat.; οὐκ ἀπὸ πράγματος Dem.

in partitive sense, αἶσ᾽ ἀπὸ ληΐδος a part from the booty, a share of it, Od.

OF TIME, from, after, ἀπὸ δείπνου after supper, Il.; ἀπὸ δείπνου γενέσθαι to have done supper, Hdt., etc.; ἀφ᾽ οὗ (sc. χρόνου), Lat. ex quo, id. Hdt., etc.

OF ORIGIN, CAUSE, etc.:

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
82%from
from82% · 556×of7% · 48×by3% · 22×other renderings8% · 51×

677 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 23 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial91%subject5%predicate2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 647 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐκπορεύομαιI journey out, cἀπόλαόςa people, the cr
καίand, even, also, nam
εἰμίI am, existτρεῖςthreeδεκατέσσαρεςfourteen
Article the
τὶςγινώσκωI come to know, ἸησοῦςJesus
ἐγώ
ὥστεso that, therefoκαθαρίζωI make cleanῥύομαιI rescue
εἰρήνηpeace, peace of mind
καίand, even, also,ἔλεοςpity, mercyμετά
ἀπόfrom647×
what comes after →
Article the
ΓαλιλαίαGalileeθεόςGod, a godἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,ὅτιthat, since, bec
σύ
καίand, even, also,συμφέρωI collect, am prκαλόςbeautiful, good,
θεόςGod, a god
πατήρfather, Father, ἐξέρχομαιI go out, come oἔρχομαιI come, go
ἀρχήruler, beginning
ἵναin order that, sκτίσιςcreation, creatuArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀπό · 647× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Acts Mark John Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians 1 Thessalonians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 12c. AD 40

ὅθεν οὐκ ἀπὸ σκοποῦ καὶ τὴν γένεσιν ἀνέγραψεν αὐτοῦ μάλα σεμνῶς θεολογήσας.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι τῶν ἐθνῶν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκισάντων προσηγορεύθη.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.3c. AD 100

ὅτι ἀληθῶς βλέπω ἐν ὑμῖν ἐκκεχυμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ πλουσίου τῆς πηγῆς κυρίου πνεῦμα ἐφ̓ ὑμᾶς.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 7th c. AD
P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος αὐτοῖς καὶ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς παστοφορίου ὠκοδομημένου καὶ δεδοκωμένου καὶ τεθυρωμένου ἐν τῷ

P.Amh. 2 51Pathyris89 BC

ἔτους κϛ Μεσορὴι κη. ἀπέδοτο Πετεῆσις Πατῆτος Πελαίαι Εὐνόου τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῶι ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ ἀπηλιώτου μέρει Παθύρεως οἰκίαν ᾠκοδομημένην καὶ δεδοκωμένην καὶ τεθυρωμένην ἧς αἱ γειτνίαι δεδήλωνται διὰ

how much more the blood <the> of Christ, who through [the] Spirit eternal Himself offered unblemished <the> to God, will purify the conscience of us from dead works in order <the> to serve God [the] living?
νεκρῶνnekros dead G3498 Adjective · genitive · plural · neuter
128× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Hebrews as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for dead, meaning something or someone is lifeless, either physically or spiritually, as seen in Matthew 28:4 and Revelation 1:18.
Amplified meaning
spiritual lifelessness
Tyndale gloss
dead
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

νεκρός is an adjective meaning 'dead,' derived from a root associated with corpses. It describes both literal death and metaphorical states, such as spiritual death or being inactive. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, including references to the dead (e.g., Mt 11:5) and spiritual conditions (e.g., Ro 6:13). The word can also function as a noun, referring to the dead as a group.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

νεκρός, -ά, -όν,

[in LXX chiefly for מֵת;]

dead,

as adj.,

prop.: Ac 5:10 20:9, Ja 2:26, Re 1:18, al.; ὡσεὶ ν., Mt 28:4, Mk 9:26, Re 1:17; of that which is subject to death, Ro 8:10.

Metaph.,

of persons: Lk 15:24, 32; of those immersed in worldly cares, Mt 8:22, Lk 9:60; of spiritual death, Jo 5:25, Ro 6:13,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

νεκρός, -d, -dv, (akin to the Lat. neco, nex [fr. ἃ r. signifying ‘to disappear’ ete.; cf. Curtius § 93; Fick i. p. , 123; Vanitek p. 422 sq.]), Sept. chiefly for n>; dead, » i.e. 1. prop. a. one that has breathed his last, lifeless: Mt. xxviii. 4; Mk. ix. 26; Lk. vii. 15; Acts v. 10; xx. 9; xxviii. 6; Heb. xi. 35; Rev.i. 17; ἐπὶ νεκροῖς, if men are dead (where death has occurred [see ἐπί, B. 2 ἃ. €. p. 233

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

νεκρός (nekros) — dead.

νεκρός, ὁ

(of a woman, [Refs 4th c.BC+], corpse, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: as substantive, in early writers always of mankind, νεκροὺς συλήσετε τεθνηῶτας [Refs 8th c.BC+]: frequently of those killed in battle, τοὺς ν. ὑποσπόνδους ἀνείλοντο [Refs 5th c.BC+]; later, of a fish, ν. ἰχθύος [Refs 1st c.AD+]

2. dying person, μυχθισμὸς νεκρῶν [Refs 5th c.BC+]

3. metaphorically, ὁ υἱός μου ν. ἦν καὶ ἀνέζησε [NT]

4. in plural, the dead, as dwellers in the nether world, κλυτὰ ἔθνεα νεκρῶν [NT+8th c.BC+]

II. as adjective νεκρός, ά, όν, dead, first in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ν. σώματα Mitteis [Refs 5th c.BC+] (but also τὰ τῶν ν. σώματα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: comparative -ότερος[Refs 1st c.AD+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

νεκρός

nekros

from an apparently primary nekus (a corpse); dead (literally or

figuratively; also as noun):--dead.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

νεκρός, ά, όν

Adj

dead, a corpse

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

νεκρός nekros 128x

dead, without life, Mt. 11:5; 22:31; met. νεκρός τινι, dead to a thing, no longer devoted to, or under the influence of a thing, Rom. 6:11; dead in respect of fruitlessness, Jas. 2:17, 20, 26; morally or spiritually dead, Rom. 6:13; Eph. 5:14; dead in alienation from God, Eph. 2:1, 5; Col. 2:13; subject to death, mortal, Rom. 8:10; causing death and misery, fatal, having a destructive power, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

νεκρός νεκρός, οῦ, ὁ, = νέκυς a dead body, corpse, Hom., etc.: —in pl. the dead, as dwellers in the nether world, Od.; τοὺς ἑαυτῶν ν. their own dead, of those killed in battle, Thuc.

as adj., νεκρός, ή, όν, dead, Pind.:— comp. -ότερος Anth.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-GPN — Adjective · genitive · plural · neuter
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-GPN Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

ded (muth; nekros): Used in several senses:

(1) as a substantive, denoting the body deprived of life, as when Abraham speaks of burying his dead (Ge 23);

(2) as a collective noun including all those that have passed away from life (as Re 20:12). In several passages dead in this sense is used in contrast to the quick or living (as Nu 16:48). This collective mode of expression is used when resurrection is described as "rising from the dead";

(3) as an adjective, coupled with body, carcass or man, as De 14:8 the King James Version;

(4) most frequently it is used as a complement of the verb "to be," referring to the condition of being deceased or the period of death, e. g. 2Sa…

Across the New Testament18 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 34 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Polycarp The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.108c. AD 40

„Ζῶμεν τὸν ἐκείνων θάνατον, τεθνήκαμεν δὲ τὸν ἐκείνων βίον," ὡς νῦν μέν, ὅτε ζῶμεν, τεθνηκυίας τῆς ψυχῆς καὶ ὡς ἂν ἐν σήματι τῷ σώματι ἐντετυμβευμένης, εἰ δὲ ἀποθάνοιμεν, τῆς ψυχῆς ζώσης τὸν ἴδιον βίον καὶ ἀπηλλαγμένης κακοῦ καὶ νεκροῦ συνδέτου τοῦ…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.55c. AD 75–95

ἔνθεν ὁ Κάις παροξυνθεὶς ἐπὶ τῷ προτετιμῆσθαι τὸν Ἄβελον ὑπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ κτείνει τὸν ἀδελφὸν καὶ τὸν νεκρὸν αὐτοῦ ποιήσας ἀφανῆ λήσειν ὑπέλαβεν.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 5.6c. AD 100

οἱ προφῆται, ἀπ̓ αὐτοῦ ἔχοντες τὴν χάριν, εἰς αὐτὸν ἐπροφήτευσαν: αὐτὸς δέ, ἵνα καταργήσῃ τὸν θάνατον καὶ τὴν ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀνάστασιν δείξῃ, ὅτι ὲν σαρκὶ ἕδει αὐτὸν φανερωθῆναι, ὑπέμεινεν,

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 1st c. BC 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Mich. 5 228Areos Kome (Arsinoites)AD 47

εἰς τὰ παρατυχόντα μέρη τοῦ σώματος ἐγκύῳ οὔσῃ ὥστε παρʼ αὐτῇ ἐκτέτρωται τὸ βρέφος νεκρὸν ὥστε αὐτὴν κατακλινῆ εἶναι καὶ κινδυνεύειν τοῦ ζῆν. διὸ ἀξιῶ γράψαι τοῖς τῆς Ὠξυρύνχων

P.Fouad 1 75ArsinoitesAD 64

τετελευτηκέναι καὶ ἤδη εὐτυχῆσθαιτῷ Φαῶφι τῆι ἐνάτηι ἀπʼ ὠμοτοκετοῦ· ἔτεκεν γὰρ ὀκτὼ μηνῶν παιδίον νεκρὸν καὶ τέσσαρας ἡμέρας ἐπέζωσε καὶ μετὰ ταῦτα τετελεύτηκεν καὶ περιεστάλη ὑφʼ ἡμῶν καὶ τοῦ

PSI 8 967AD 1–AD 200

δυνασθῶ ἀναπλεῦσαι βουλεύομαι αὐτὴν ὥδε θάψαι πρόσδεξαι αὐτὴν ἐν τῷ ἄρτι ἐρχομένῳ πλοίῳ τῶν νεκρῶν πέμψον μοι ταχύτερον ἵνα ἰσχύσω ἀναβῆναι μετὰ τὴν ἑορτήν. ταῦτα λέγει Ἀφροδισία τῷ πατρὶ

how much more the blood <the> of Christ, who through [the] Spirit eternal Himself offered unblemished <the> to God, will purify the conscience of us from dead works in order <the> to serve God [the] living?
ἔργωνergon works G2041 Noun · genitive · plural · neuter
169× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Hebrews as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This term refers to work, toil, or occupation, and can also imply an act or deed. In the Bible, it is used to describe various tasks and activities, such as Jesus' work on earth and the deeds of Christians.
Amplified meaning
deeds, actions
Tyndale gloss
work
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἔργον, transliterated as ergon, means 'work' or 'deed' and is derived from a root meaning 'to work.' It encompasses a wide range of meanings, including tasks, actions, and products of labor. In the New Testament, it is frequently used to describe both human actions and divine works, appearing in verses like John 3:21 and Ephesians 2:10.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἔργον, -ου, τό (originally Ϝέργον, work), [very freq. in LXX, chiefly for מַעֲשֶׂה, מְלָאכָה, also for עֲבֹדָה, פֹּעַל, etc. ;]

work, task, employment: Mk 13:34, Jo 4:34 17:4, Ac 13:2, Phl 1:22 2:30, I Th 5:13, al.; of an enterprise or undertaking (De 15:10, Wi 2:12), Ac 5:38.

a deed, action: Tit 1:16, Ja 1:25 . disting. from λόγος, Lk 24:19, Ro 15:18, II Th 2:17

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἔργον, -ου, τό, anciently Fepyov, (Germ.Werk, [ Eng. work; ef. Vanitek p. 9227); Sept. for Ὁ}, 772y, and countless times for man and wy; work i. 6. 1. business, employment, that with which any one is occupied : Mk. xiii. 34 (διδόναι τινὶ τὸ ἔργον αὐτοῦ); Acts xiv. 26 (πληροῦν) ; 1 Tim. iii. 1; thus of the work of salvation committed by God to Christ: διδόναι and τελειοῦν, Jn. xvii. 4; of the work to be done by the apostles and other Christian teachers, as well as by the presiding officers of the religious assemblies, Acts xiii. 2; xv. 38; 1 Th. v. 13; Phil. i. 22; τὸ ἔργον τινός, yen. of the subj., the work which one does, service which one either performs or ought to perform, 1 Th. v. 13; ἔργον ποιεῖν τινος to do the work of one (i. 6. incumbent upon him), εὐαγγελιστοῦ, 2 Tim. iv.5; τὸ ἔργον τινός i. e. assigned by one and to be done for his sake: τὸ ἔργον τοῦ θεοῦ τελειοῦν, used of…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἔργον. A few miscellaneous exx. of this common word (MGr ἔργο) will suffice : P Petr II. 11 (1) (mid. iii/B.c.) εἰ δυνατόν ἐστιν καὶ μηθέν σε τῶν ἔργων κωλύει, πειράθητι ἐλθεῖν els τὰ ᾿Αρσινόεια, P Par 667: (i/B.c.) ὧν τὰ ἔργα ἀναβάλουσιν (1 --λλ--}, ‘‘whose work is postponed,” P Oxy XII. 1457} (B.C. 4-3) O[vous] θηλήας δύο. . ἐργαζομένας pov τὰ ἴδια ἔργα, P Ryl II. 154° (a.p. 66) τὰ kat’ ἔϊτο]ς γεωργικὰ ἔργα πάντα, and P Tebt 11. 423% (early iii/A.D.) ἄλλοτέ σοι ἔγραψα ὑπομιμνήσκων περὶ τῶν ἔργων. In P Giss I. 201° (ii/A.D.) the word is almost = ‘‘ sample ”—épyé[fo]par τὰ ἔρια! . . . ἃ] ἔγραψας... ὁποῖ]ον δέ σοι χρῶ[μ]α ἀρέσκει, [δήλω]σον δι᾽ ἐπι[σ]τολῆς ἢ μεικρὸν ἔρ[γο]ν (or ἔρ[ιο Jv, see 5.U. ἀρέσκω) αὐτοῦ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἔργον (ergon) — work.

ἔργον,

Doric dialect ϝέργον [Refs 6th c.BC+], Elean ϝάργον [Refs 6th c.BC+] weorc (neuter) 'work', Avest. var[schwa]za-):— work, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; especially in plural, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὰ σ᾽ αὐτῆς ἔργα κόμιζε see to thine own tasks, [Refs 8th c.BC+]

1. in [Refs 8th c.BC+]works or deeds of war, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν τῷ ἔ. during the action, [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἔργου ἔχεσθαι to engage in battle, [Refs]

2. of peaceful contests, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also ἔργα θῆκε κάλλιστ᾽ ἀμφὶ κόμαις placed [the reward of] noble deeds about his hair, [Refs]

3. of works of industry,

3. a of tillage, tilled lands, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὔτε βοῶν οὔτ᾽ ἀνδρῶν φαίνετο ἔργα [Refs] —the title of Hesiod's work; πατρώϊα ἔ. their father's lands, [Refs 8th c.BC+] will neither go to our farms, [Refs]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἔργον

ergon

from a primary (but obsolete) ergo (to work); toil (as an effort or

occupation); by implication, an act:--deed, doing, labour, work.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἔργον, ου, τό

n.n.

work, labor, action, deed

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἔργον ergon 169x

anything done or to be done; a deed, work, action, Jn. 3:21; Eph. 2:10; 2 Cor. 9:8, et al. freq.; duty enjoined, office, charge, business, Mk. 13:34; Jn. 4:34, et al. freq.; a process, course of action, Jas. 1:4; a work, product of an action or process, Acts 7:41; Heb. 1:10; substance in effect, Rom. 2:15

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἔργον ἔργον, ου, τό, Ε῎ργω work, Hom., etc.; τὰ σαυτῆς ἔργα κόμιζε mind your own business, Hom.:

in Il. mostly of deeds of war, πολεμήϊα ἔργα Il., etc.; so, ἐν τῷ ἔργῳ during the action, Thuc.; ἔργου ἔχεσθαι to engage in battle, id. Thuc.

of works of industry, tilled lands, fields, farms, Hom.; οὔτε βοῶν οὔτ᾽ ἀνδρῶν ἔργα (cf. Virgil's hominumque boumque labores), Il.; ἔργα Ἰθάκης the tilled lands of Ithaca, Od.; so in attic, τὰ κατ᾽ ἀγροὺς ἔργα, etc.:—then, generally, property, wealth, possessions, ἔργον ἀέξειν Od.

of women's work, weaving, Hom.

of other occupations, θαλάσσια ἔργα fishing, as a way of life, Od.; periphr., ἔργα δαιτός works of feasting, Il.; so, ἔργα θήρας, etc. Xen., etc.:—in attic also of all kinds of works, such as…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GPN — Noun · genitive · plural · neuter
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GPN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Nave's Topical Bible

→ GOOD

Jesus an example of Joh 10:32; Ac 10:38

Holy women should manifest 1Ti 2:10; 5:10

God remembers Ne 13:14; with Heb 6:9,10

Will be brought into judgment Ec 12:14; with 2Co 5:10

In the judgment, will be an evidence of faith Mt 25:34-40; with Jas 2:14-20

Servants should be patterns of Tit 2:7

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
59%works
works59% · 103×work29% · 51×deeds7% · 13×deed3% · 5×other renderings2% · 4×

176 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 7 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial47%object33%subject14%predicate5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 169 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
κατάσύἐκ
ἐκ
οὐNegὅτιthat, since, becσύ
καλόςbeautiful, good, wor
Article theπαρέχωI offer, provideπερί
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
πρόςεἰςἐν
ἐν
δυνατόςpowerful, able, DisjπλουτέωI become rich
ἔργονworks169×
what comes after →
Article the
θεόςGod, a godπατήρfather, Father, χείρa hand
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,πονηρόςevil, bad, wickeἐν
ἀγαθόςgood
καίand, even, also,δόξαhonor, renown, gὅς
ὅς
ποιέωI do, makeἐγώδίδωμιI offer, give
νόμοςa law, the Mosaic La
οὐNegἐάνCondὅτιthat, since, bec

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἔργον · 169× in the New Testament
John Revelation James Romans Acts Hebrews 1 Corinthians Galatians Titus 1 Timothy 2 Timothy Matthew

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 285 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 9c. AD 40

τὸ δὲ παθητὸν ἄψυχον καὶ ἀκίνητον ἐξ ἑαυτοῦ, κινηθὲν δὲ καὶ σχηματισθὲν καὶ ψυχωθὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ νοῦ μετέβαλεν εἰς τὸ τελειότατον ἔργον, τόνδε τὸν κόσμον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.19c. AD 75–95

ἰστέον οὖν, ὅτι πάντων ἐκεῖνος ἀναγκαιότατον ἡγήσατο τῷ καὶ τὸν ἑαυτοῦ μέλλοντι βίον οἰκονομήσειν καλῶς καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις νομοθετεῖν θεοῦ πρῶτον φύσιν κατανοῆσαι καὶ τῶν ἔργων τῶν ἐκείνου θεατὴν τῷ νῷ γενόμενον οὕτως παράδειγμα τὸ πάντων ἄριστον…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.6c. AD 100

Τρία οὖν δόγματά ἐστιν κυρίου: ζωῆς ἐλπίς, ἀρχὴ καὶ τέλος πίστεως ἡμῶν: καὶ δικαιοσύνη, κρίσεως ἀρχὴ καὶ τέλος: ἀγάπη εὐφροσύνης καὶ ἀγαλλιάσεως ἔργων δικαιοσύνης μαρτυρία.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Cair. Zen. 2 59291Philadelphia (Arsinoites)252 BC

Ζήνωνι χαίρειν Ἁρμάεις καὶ Τεῶς. ἐνέβημεν εἰς τὰ ἔργα ἀπὸ ἔτους λδ, σοῦ συντάξαντος ἡμῖν τοῖς ἔργοις προσέχειν τετράμηνον. ἔστιν δὲ ἡμῖν μῆνες

P.Cair. Zen. 2 59296Arsinoites251 BC

τοὺς … διώρυγι καὶ εἰς … ὡς τῶν δ … γίνονται δραχμαὶ ρνδ γίνονται ἔργων δραχμαὶ φκβ εἰσὶ δὲ φ καὶ ὥστε Ἄνδρωνι εἰς τοὺς ἐν Φιλαδελφείαι φυλακίτας καὶ

P.Cair. Zen. 3 59369Krokodilopolis (Arsinoites)242 BC

ὅτι ἐπίστῃ με ε οικοτημον. καλῶς οὖν ποιήσεις γράψας Ἀγήνορι ὅπως ἀφεθεὶς πρὸς τοῖς ἔργοις γένωμαι καὶ μὴ ἐν τῆι φυλακῆι καταφθαρῶ. ἔρρωσο. ἔτους ζ, Ἐπεὶφ

how much more the blood <the> of Christ, who through [the] Spirit eternal Himself offered unblemished <the> to God, will purify the conscience of us from dead works in order <the> to serve God [the] living?
εἰςeis in order G1519 Preposition
1,766× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Hebrews as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means toward or into, indicating direction or purpose, as seen in Matthew 8:23 and Mark 1:45. It can also imply a sense of movement or action. The KJV translates it in various ways.
Tyndale gloss
toward
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

εἰς is a preposition meaning 'into' or 'to,' used with the accusative case. It indicates direction, entrance, or limit, applicable to place, time, and figurative purposes. The New Testament frequently employs it to express movement toward locations or states, as seen in passages like Matthew 8:23. It can also denote relationships or results, such as 'for' or 'among.'

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἰς,

prep. c. acc.,

expressing entrance, direction, limit, into, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among (Lat. in, c. acc.).

Of place.

After verbs of motion;

of entrance into: Mt 8:23 9:7, Mk 1:45, Lk 2:15 8:31, al.;

of approach, to or towards: Mk 11:1, Lk 6:8 19:28, Jo 11:31 21:6, al.;

before pl. and collective nouns, among: Mk 4:7 8:19, 20, Lk 11:49, Jo 21:23, al.;

Of a limit reached, unto, on, upon: Mt 8:18, 21:1, Mk…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εἰς, a Prep. governing the Accusative, and denoting entrance into, or direction and limit: into, to, towards, for, among. It is used A. Property I. of Place, after verbs of going, coming, sailing, flying, falling, living, leading, carrying, throwing, sending, etc. ; 1. of a place entered, or of entrance into a place, into; and 8. it stands before nouns designating an open place, a hollow thing, or one in which an object can be hidden: as εἰς (τὴν) πόλιν, Mt. xxvi. 18; xxviii. 11; Mk. i. 45, and often; εἰς r. οἶκον, Mt. ix. 7; συναγωγήν, Acts xvii. 10; πλοῖον, Mt. viii. 23; Jn. vi. 17; Acts xxi. 6; θάλασσαν, Mt. xvii. 27; ἄβυσσον, Lk. viii. 31; οὐρανόν, Lk. ii. 15; κόσμον, In. 1. 9; iii. 19, ete.; τὰ ἴδια, Jn. i. 11; xvi. 32; Acts xxi. 6; ἀποθήκην, Mt. iii. 12; εἰς ra ὦτα, Lk. i. 44; εἰς τὰς ζώνας or ζώνην, Mt. x. 9; Mk. vi. 8, etc.; εἰς ἀέρα, 1 Co. xiv. 9; eis πῦρ, Mk. ix. 22, ete.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εἰς ἁλιέων εἰς ᾿Αλεξάνδριί[αν (P Oxy II. 2943 = Selections, Ρ- 34): see further Pro/eg. pp. 234 f., 245. For εἰς in the wide sense in which we use ‘‘for” we may cite such passages as P Lille I. 261 (iii/B.c.) ἔγραψάς μοι περὶ τῆς εἰς THY σησαμείαν γῆς, 20." ἕως ἂν] μάθωμεν περὶ τῶν κ[εχρ]ηματισμένων εἰς τὸν νομόν, P Petr II. 11 (1)" (mid. iii/B.c.) (= Witkowski*, p. 8) ἀπὸ τούτου τὸ μὲν ἥμυσυ εἰς τὰ δέοντα ὑπελιπόμην, τὸ δὲ λοιπὸν εἰς τὸ δάνειον κατέβαλον, P Lond 43? (ii/B.c.) (=I. p. 48, Witkowski’, p- 110) ἕξεις ἐφόδιον εἰς τὸ γῆρας, P Tebt I. 577 (8.6. 118) προστε]τάχασι δὲ καὶ τὰ els τὴν ταφὴν τοῦ “Amos, P Oxy I. 379 (A.D. 149) (= Selections, p. 49) ἐγένετο ἐνθάδε ἡ τροφεῖτις εἰς υἱὸν tod ΤΠεσούριος, ‘‘there was concluded here the nursing-contract for the son of Pesouris”; and the recurring formulae in a private account of ς. A.D. 15 τό. 1V. 736° θρύων εἰς τοὺς ἄρτους (ὀβολοὶ δύο)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἰς (eis) — toward.

ἐν εἰς

or ἐς, PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY:—both forms are found in [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect poets, and early metrical Inscrr.; ἐς is best attested in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and is found in nearly all early Ionic dialect Inscrr. (except [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and usually in Attic dialect Prose (except [Refs 5th c.BC+] is used before vowels for the sake of meter; ἐς was retained in the phrases ἐς κόρακας (whence the Verb σκορακίζω), ἐς μακαρίαν. Aeolic dialect poets have εἰς before vowels, ἐς before consonants, and this is given as the rule in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; compare ἐν, ἰν. The diphthong is genuine in Aeolic dialect εἰς, but spurious in Attic dialect-Ionic dialect) Radical sense into, and then more loosely, to:

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἰς

eis

a primary preposition; to or into (indicating the point reached or

entered), of place, time, or (figuratively) purpose (result, etc.);

also in adverbial phrases:--(abundant-)ly, against, among, as, at,

(back-)ward, before, by, concerning, + continual, + far more

exceeding, for (intent, purpose), fore,

+ forth, in (among, at, unto, -so much that, -to), to the

intent that, + of one mind, + never, of, (up-)on, + perish, + set at

one again, (so) that, therefore(-unto), throughout, til, to (be, the

end, -ward), (here-)until(-to), ...ward, (where-)fore, with. Often

used in composition with the same general import, but only with verbs

(etc.) expressing motion (literally or figuratively).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἰς

Prep.

into, in, among, till, for

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

εἰς

into, to c. acc.

PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY. Radical sense, into, and then to:

OF PLACE, the commonest usage, εἰς ἅλα into or to the sea, Hom., etc.:—properly opposed to ἐκ, ἐς σφυρὸν ἐκ πτέρνης from head to foot, Il.; εἰς ἔτος ἐξ ἔτεος from year to year, Theocr.:—then, with all Verbs implying motion or direction, ἰδεῖν εἰς οὐρανόν Il.; εἰς ὦπα ἰδέσθαι to look in the face, id. Il.:—in Hom. and Hdt. also c. acc. pers., where the attic use ὡς, πρός, παρά.

with Verbs which express rest in a place, when a previous motion into or to it is implied, ἐς μέγαρον κατέθηκε, i. e. he brought it into the house, and put it there, Od.; παρεῖναι ἐς τόπον to go to a place and be there, Hdt.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

or'-der (`arakh, "to arrange"; tassein ( diatassein, taxis, tagma)): "Order" in Biblical phrases may indicate

(1) arrangement in rows,

(2) sequence in time,

(3) classification and organization,

(4) likeness or manner,

(5) regulation, direction or command, or

(6) the declaring of a will.

In many passages it is difficult if not impossible to determine from the English text alone in which of these senses the word is used.

1. Arrangement in Rows:

The fundamental idea suggested by the Hebrew, Greek and English words is that of arrangement in rows. Thus "order" is used in the Bible of arranging wood for an altar (Le 1:7; 1Ki 18:33; compare Hebrew Ge 22:9; Isa 30:33); of laying out…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
33%into
into33% · 595×to32% · 570×for10% · 185×in9% · 160×unto4% · 69×toward2% · 44×other renderings8% · 145×other renderings2% · 29×

1,797 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial95%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,766 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
βάλλωI cast, throw, rεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inδέbut, on the othe
εἰσέρχομαιI go in, come in, en
καίand, even, also,μήNegαὐτός
ἔρχομαιI come, go
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςοὗτος
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἐκκόπτωI cut out, cut oπόλιςa city
ἐγώ
εἰμίI am, existκαίand, even, also,δίδωμιI offer, give
εἰςin order1766×
what comes after →
Article the
αἰώνan age, a cycle οἶκοςa house, househoοὐρανόςthe sky, the hea
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,οὗτος
ἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem
καίand, even, also,εἰςὅτιthat, since, bec
ὅς
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἄνDisj
σύ
καίand, even, also,μήNegἐν

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεἰς · 1,766× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Matthew John Mark Romans Revelation 2 Corinthians Hebrews 1 Peter 1 Corinthians Ephesians

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 9c. AD 40

τὸ δὲ παθητὸν ἄψυχον καὶ ἀκίνητον ἐξ ἑαυτοῦ, κινηθὲν δὲ καὶ σχηματισθὲν καὶ ψυχωθὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ νοῦ μετέβαλεν εἰς τὸ τελειότατον ἔργον, τόνδε τὸν κόσμον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι λιμοῦ τὴν Χαναναίαν καταλαβόντος εἰς Αἴγυπτον ἀπῆρε καὶ διατρίψας ἐν αὐτῇ τινα χρόνον ὑπέστρεψεν ὀπίσω.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Grenf. 2 33Pathyris101 BC

καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων , τεσσάρων εἰς συμπλήρωσιν ἐτῶν πέντε , ὥστε γεωργῆσαι ἧς

BGU 3 999Pathyris100 BC

καὶ ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς Εὐνόου οἰκίας λιβὸς ῥύμη ἐφ ᾧ ἀνοίξει τὴν θύραν εἰς τὴν Ὀρσηοῦς οἰκίαν ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Πετεσοῦχος Νεχθανούπιος ὡς ἐτῶν

P.Adl. 17Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC

ος, βορρᾶ γῆ Σχώτου τοῦ Τρύφωνος, ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς γῆς, λιβὸς ἡ φέρουσα εἰς τὸ Κρόνειον ὁδός, ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου Πέρσης τῆς

how much more the blood <the> of Christ, who through [the] Spirit eternal Himself offered unblemished <the> to God, will purify the conscience of us from dead works in order <the> to serve God [the] living?
τὸho <the> G3588 Article · accusative · singular · neuter
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Hebrews as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-ASN — Article · accusative · singular · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-ASN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
<the>19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

how much more the blood <the> of Christ, who through [the] Spirit eternal Himself offered unblemished <the> to God, will purify the conscience of us from dead works in order <the> to serve God [the] living?
λατρεύεινlatreuō to serve G3000 Verb · present · active · infinitive
21× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Hebrews than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To minister means to serve God and give Him homage, as seen in Matthew 4:10 and Acts 7:7. It involves working for God and worshiping Him. This concept is central to the New Testament.
Amplified meaning
minister, worship
Tyndale gloss
to minister
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word λατρεύω (i.e., *latreuo*) is derived from λάτρις (a hired servant) and primarily means to serve or worship, particularly in a religious context. It encompasses both the service to God and the worship of idols, appearing frequently in the New Testament. The term is closely related to the idea of ministerial service and is often associated with acts of homage and devotion.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — λατρεύω, λειτουργέω from a scan

In both these words the notion of service lies, but of service under certain special limitations in the second, as compared with the first. Aartpevew, allied to λάτρις, ‘a hired servant,’ Adtpov, ‘hire,’ and perhaps to λεία, Anis (so Curtius), is, properly, ‘ to serve for hire,’ and therefore not of compulsion, as does a slave, though the line of separation between λάτρις and δοῦλος is by no means always observed. Already in classical Greek both it and λατρεία are occasionally transferred from the service of men to the service of the higher powers; as by Plato, Apol. 23 c: ἡ τοῦ Θεοῦ λατρεία: cf. Phedr. 244 e; and Euripides, Troad. 450, where Cassandra is ἡ ᾿Απόλλωνος λάτρις : and a meaning, which in Scripture is the only one, is anticipated in part. In the Septuagint, λατρεύειν never expresses any other service but either that of the true God, or of the false gods of heathenism ; for…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

λατρεύω

(< λάτρις, a hired servant),

[in LXX (always, as λατρεία, of the service of God or of heathen divinities) chiefly for עבד, Ex 3:12, al.; in Da LXX TH (3:12, al.) for פְּלַח;]

to work for hire.

to serve; in cl., also of divine service, to serve, worship, and so always in NT: c. dat. pers., τ. θεῷ, Mt 4:10, Lk 4:8(LXX), Ac 7:7 24:14 27:23, He 9:14, Re 7:15 22:3; of idol worship (cf. Ex 20:5, Ez 20:32),

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

λατρεύω ; fut. λατρεύσω ; 1 aor. eAdrpevoa; (λάτρις ἃ hireling, Lat. /atro in Enn. and Plaut.; λάτρον hire) ; in Grk. writ. a. to serve for hire; b. univ. fo serve, minister to, either gods or men, and used alike of slaves and of freemen; in the N. T. to render religious service or homage, to worship, (Hebr. 123, Deut. vi. 13; x. 12; Josh. xxiv. 15); in a broad sense, λατρ. θεῷ: Mt. iv. 10 and Lk. iv. 8, (after Deut. vi. 13); Acts vii. 7; xxiv. 14; xxvii. 23; Heb. ix.14; Rev. vii.15; xxii. 3; of the worship of idols, Acts vii. 42; Ro. i. 25, (Ex. xx. 5; xxiii. 24; Ezek. xx. 32). Phrases relating to the manner of worshipping are these: θεῷ [so R ΑἸ λατρεύειν | πνεύματι (dat. of instr.), with the spirit or soul, Phil. iii. 3, but LT Tr WH have correctly restored πνεύματι θεοῦ, i. e. prompted by, filled with, the Spirit of God, so that the dat. of the pers. (τῷ θεῷ) is suppressed ; ἐν τῷ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

λατρεύω in Biblical Greek always refers to the service or worship of the true God or of heathen divinities: see SH on Rom 1°, where the relation of the verb to λειτουργέω is discussed. For its relation to δουλεύω see Thackeray Gy. i. p. 8: cf. also Anz Subsidia, p. 296.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

λατρεύω (latreuō) — to minister.

λατρ-εύω,

Elean λατρείω (which see), work for hire or pay, [Refs 6th c.BC+]: to be in servitude, serve, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. λ. τινί to be subject or enslaved to, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with accusative person, serve, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; λ. νόμοις obey, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; λ. καιρῷ, = Latin temporibus inservire, [Refs 1st c.AD+]; τῷ κάλλει λ. to be devoted to.., [Refs 5th c.BC+]

3. serve the gods with prayers and sacrifices, λ. Φοίβῳ [Refs 5th c.BC+] render due service, [Refs]; πόνον.. τόνδ᾽ ἐλάτρευσα θεᾷ [Refs]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

λατρεύω

latreuo

from latris (a hired menial); to minister (to God), i.e. render

religious homage:--serve, do the service, worship(-per).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

λατρεύω

v.

I serve, worship

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

λατρεύω latreuō 21x

to be a servant, to serve, Acts 27:23; to render religious service and homage, worship, Mt. 4:10; Lk. 1:74; spc. to offer sacrifices, present offerings, Heb. 8:5; 9:9

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

λατρεύω λατρεύω, φυτ. -σω λάτρις to work for hire or pay, to be in servitude, serve, Xen.

λ. τινί to be bound or enslaved to, Soph., Eur., etc.; c. acc. pers. to serve, Eur.:—metaph., λατρ. πέτρᾳ, of Prometheus, Aesch.; μόχθοις λατρ. Soph.; λ. νόμοις to obey, Xen.

to serve the gods, λ. Φοίβῳ Eur.: c. acc. cogn., πόνον λ. to render them due service, id. Eur.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAN — Verb · present · active · infinitive
present active infinitive — an action in progress.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAN Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: iNfinitive TVM equivalent: G5721

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
19%i serve
i serve19% · 4×serving19% · 4×serve14% · 3×worshiping10% · 2×they will serve5% · 1×worship5% · 1×they served5% · 1×minster5% · 1×other renderings19% · 4×

21 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 12 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 21 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐξέρχομαιI go out, come oὅςσεβάζομαιI worship
ὅς
θεόςGod, a godδιά
Article the
τελειόωI complete, accoεἰςἁμαρτίαa sin
μόνοςonly, solitary, deso
αὐτός
αὐτός
παραδίδωμιI hand over, delδοῦλος (II)
λατρεύωto serve21×
what comes after →
Article the
στρατιάan army, host ofπατρῷοςhereditaryκτίσιςcreation, creatu
αὐτός
ἡμέραa day
νύξthe night, night-tim
καίand, even, also,
ἐγώ
ἐν
ἐλπίζωI hope, hope for, ex
καταντάωI come down, arr

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceλατρεύω · 21× in the New Testament
Hebrews Acts Luke Revelation Romans 2 Timothy Matthew Philippians
Across the New Testament8 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 44 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Migration of Abraham 132c. AD 40

„κύριον“ γάρ φησι „τὸν θεόν σου φοβηθήσῃ καὶ αὐτῷ λατρεύσεις καὶ πρὸς αὐτὸν κολληθήσῃ“ (Deut.

how much more the blood <the> of Christ, who through [the] Spirit eternal Himself offered unblemished <the> to God, will purify the conscience of us from dead works in order <the> to serve God [the] living?
θεῷtheos God G2316 Noun · dative · singular · masculine
1,311× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Hebrews as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word simply means God, referring to the one true deity. It is used throughout the New Testament, including in Matthew 27:46 and Acts 14:11, to describe the supreme being and creator of the universe.
Amplified meaning
the one true God
Tyndale gloss
God
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

θεός (theos) means 'God' or 'a god' and is used in both singular and plural forms. It refers to the supreme deity in monotheistic contexts, as well as to lesser deities in polytheistic settings. The New Testament frequently employs this term, notably in verses like Matthew 27:46 and Acts 19:37. Some lexicons note its use as a title for rulers or magistrates, reflecting its broader application in ancient texts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

θεός, -οῦ, ὁ, ἡ (Ac 19:37 only; v. M, Pr., 60, 244), late voc., θεέ (Mt 27:46; cf. De 3:24, al.),

[in LXX chiefly for אֱלֹהִים, also for אֵל and other cognate forms, יהוה, etc.;]

a god or deity, God.

In polytheistic sense, a god or deity: Ac 28:6, I Co 8:4, II Th 2:4, al.; pl., Ac. 14:11 19:26, Ga 4:8, al.

Of the one true God;

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

θεός, -οὔ, ὁ and ἡ, voc. θεέ, once in the N. T., Mt. xxvii. 46; besides in Deut. iii. 24; Judg. [xvi. 28;] xxi. 3; [2 S. vii. 25; Is. xxxviii. 20]; Sir. xxiii. 4; Sap. ix. 1; 3 Mace. vi. 3; 4 Mace. vi. 27; Act. Thom. 44 sq. 57; Eus. h. 6. 2, 23,16; [5, 20,7; vit. Const. 2,55, 1.59]; ef. W. §8, 2 ο.; [B. 12 (11)]; ({on the eight or more proposed derivations see Vaniéek p. 386, who follows Curtius (after Doderlein) p. 513 sqq. in connecting it with a root meaning to supplicate, implore; hence the implored ; per contra cf. Max Miiller, Chips ete. iv. 227 sq.; L. and 8. s. v. fin.]); [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for 58, ΟΝ and m7; a god, a goddess; 1. a general appellation of deities or divinities: Acts xxviii. 6; 1 Co. viii. 4; 2 Th. ii. 4; once ἡ θεός, Acts xix. 37 G LT Tr WH; θεοῦ φωνὴ καὶ οὐκ ἀνθρώπου, Acts xii. 22; ἄνθρωπος ὧν ποιεῖς σεαυτὸν θεόν, Jn. x. 33; plur., of the gods of the…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

θεός. For the application of the title θεός to the Ptolemaic kings it is sufficient to recall Brit. Mus. Inscrr. IV. 1 No. 906% (B.C. 284-273) where a votive offering is dedicated in honour of Πτολεμαίου τοῦ σωτῆρος καὶ θεοῦ, and the description of Ptolemy V. (Epiphanes) on the Rosetta stone—OG/S gol? (B.C. 196) ὑπάρχων θεὸς ἐκ θεοῦ Kal θεᾶς : cf. Deissmann LAE, p. 348 and the full discussion by E. Kornemann ‘‘ Zur Geschichte der antiken Herrscherkulte” in Beztrdge zur alten Geschichte [Klio] i., p. 51 ff. (Leipzig, 1902). The same practice is still more strikingly illustrated in the Imperial period, as when in an inscr. from the Fayum district, dated March 17th, B.c. 24, Augustus is described as θεὸς ἐκ θεοῦ (OG/S 6557), or as when a votive inscr. is addressed to Nero—daya0a(t) θεῶ(ι) (Cos 927): see Deissmann 7s. p. 349. With this may be compared the frequent use for Augustus of the…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

θεός (theos) — God.

θεός, ὁ,

Boeotian dialect θιός, Laconian dialect σιός (see. below), [Refs 5th c.AD+], Cretan dialect θιός [Refs], Doric dialect also θεύς [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; vocative (only late) θεός, also θεέ [LXX+NT]; but classical in compound names, Ἀμφίθεε, Τιμόθεε:—God, the Deity, in general sense, both singular and plural (εἰ καὶ ἐπὶ θεοὺς καὶ ἔτι μᾶλλον ἐπὶ θεὸν ἁρμόζει μεταφέρειν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; σὺν θ. εἰρημένον [Refs 5th c.BC+]: so in plural, σύν γε θεοῖσιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐ θεῶν ἄτερ pi.[Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὑπὲρ θεόν against his will,[Refs 4th c.BC+]; θεῶν συνεθελόντων, βουλομένων, [Refs 5th c.BC+]bless you! good heavens! for heaven's sake! [Refs 8th c.BC+]: doubled in poets, θεὸν θεόν τις ἀγλαϊζέτω [Refs 5th c.BC+]; θεοί (Cretan dialect θιοί) as an opening formula in Inscrr. (i.e. τύχην ἀγαθὴν διδοῖεν), [Refs].1, etc.: in Prose also with the Article, ὁ θ.…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

θεός

theos

of uncertain affinity; a deity, especially (with 3588) the supreme

Divinity; figuratively, a magistrate; by Hebraism, very:--X exceeding,

God, god(-ly, -ward).

see GREEK for 3588

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

θεός, οῦ, ὁ

n.f. & n.m.

God, a god

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

θεός theos 1x

a deity, Acts 7:43; 1 Cor. 8:5; an idol, Acts 7:40; God, the true God, Mt. 3:9, et al. freq.; God, possessed of true godhead, Jn. 1:1; Rom. 9:5; from the Hebrew, applied to potentates, Jn. 10:34, 35; τῷ θεῷ, an intensive term, from the Hebrew, exceedingly, Acts 7:20, and, perhaps, 2 Cor. 10:4

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

θεός θεός, ὁ, God, Hom., both in general sense, Θεὸς δώσει God will grant, and in particular sense, θεός τις a god; πατὴρ ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε Hom.:—things are said to happen σὺν θεῷ, σύν γε θεοῖσιν by the will of God, id. Hom., etc.; οὐκ ἄνευ θεοῦ, Lat. non sine diis, Od.; οὐκ ἄνευθε θεοῦ Il.; οὐ θεῶν ἄτερ Pind.;— ἐκ θεόφι Il.;— ὑπὲρ θεόν against his will, id. Il.;— κατὰ θεόν τινα, Lat. divinitus, Eur.:—as an oath, πρὸς θεῶν by the gods, in God's name, Trag.; θεὸς ἴστω Soph., etc.

θεός as fem. for θεά, θέαινα, a goddess, Hom.; θήλεια θεός Il.; ἡ νερτέρα θ. Proserpine, Soph.; often in oaths, νὴ τὼ θεώ id. Soph.; ναὶ τὼ σιώ, with the Spartans, of Castor and Pollux, Xen.; with the Boeotians, of Amphion and Zethus, id.…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-DSM — Noun · dative · singular · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-DSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

god ('Elohim, 'El, [`Elyon], Shadday, Yahweh; Theos):

I. INTRODUCTION TO THE GENERAL IDEA

1. The Idea in Experience and in Thought

2. Definition of the Idea

3. The Knowledge of God

4. Ethnic Ideas of God

(1) Animism

(2) Fetishism

(3) Idolatry

(4) Polytheism

(5) Henotheism

(6) Pantheism

(7) Deism

(8) Semitic Monolatry

(9) Monotheism

II. THE IDEA OF GOD IN THE OLD TESTAMENT

1. The Course of Its Development

2. Forms of Its Manifestation

(1) The Face or Countenance of God

(2) The Voice and Word of God

(3) The Glory of God

(4) The Angel of God

(5) The Spirit of God

(6) The Name of God

(7) Occasional Forms

3. The Names of God

(1) Generic

(2) Attributive

(3) Yahweh

4. Pre-prophetic Conceptions of God

(1) Yahweh Alone Is the God of Israel

(a) His Early Worship

(b) Popular Religion

(c) Polytheistic Tendencies

(i) Coordination

(ii) Assimilation

(iii) Disintegration

(d) No Hebrew Goddesses

(e) Human Sacrifices

Easton's Bible Dictionary

God

(A.S. and Dutch God; Dan. Gud; Ger. Gott), the name of the Divine Being. It is the rendering (1) of the Hebrew ’El, from a word meaning to be strong; (2) of ’Eloah_, plural _’Elohim. The singular form, Eloah, is used only in poetry. The plural form is more commonly used in all parts of the Bible, The Hebrew word Jehovah (q.v.), the only other word generally employed to denote the Supreme Being, is uniformly rendered in the Authorized Version by “LORD,” printed in small capitals. The existence of God is taken for granted in the Bible. There is nowhere any argument to prove it. He who disbelieves this truth is spoken of as one devoid of understanding (Ps. 14:1).

The arguments generally adduced by theologians in proof of the being of God are:

(1.) The a priori argument, which is the testimony afforded by reason.

Smith's Bible Dictionary

(good). Throughout the Hebrew Scriptures two chief names are used for the one true divine Being--ELOHIM, commonly translated God in our version, and JEHOVAH, translated Lord . Elohim is the plural of Eloah (in Arabic Allah); it is often used in the short form EL (a word signifying strength , as in EL-SHADDAI, God Almighty, the name by which God was specially known to the patriarchs. (Genesis 17:1; 28:3; Exodus 6:3) The etymology is uncertain, but it is generally agreed that the primary idea is that of strength, power of effect , and that it properly describes God in that character in which he is exhibited to all men in his works, as the creator, sustainer and supreme governor of the world. The plural form of Elohim has given rise to much discussion. The fanciful idea that it…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

This name, the derivation of which is uncertain, we give to that eternal, infinite, perfect, and incomprehensible Being, the Creator of all things, who preserves and governs all by his almighty power and wisdom, and is the only proper object of worship. The proper Hebrew name for God is JEHOVAH, which signifies He is. But the Jews, from a feeling of reverence, avoid pronouncing this name, substituting for it, wherever it occurs in the sacred test, the word ADONAI, Lord; except in the expression, ADONAI JEHOVAH, Lord Jehovah, for which they put, ADONAI ELOHIM, Lord God. This usage, which is not without an element of superstition, is very ancient, dating its origin some centuries before Christ; but there is no good ground for assuming its existence in the days of the inspired Old Testament writers. The proper word for God is ELOHIM, which is plural in its form, being thus used to signify…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
96%god
god96% · 1289×other renderings3% · 34×other renderings1% · 19×

1,342 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 14 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject31%adverbial26%object24%predicate12%indirect object5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,311 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
βασιλείαkingship, sovereλόγοςa word, speech, υἱόςa son, descenden
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theπαράδικαιοσύνηjustice, justnes
ἀπό
εἰρήνηpeace, peace of ὅτιthat, since, becἐγώ
καίand, even, also, nam
ἈβραάμPropἸσαάκPropΧριστόςanointed, the Me
εἰμίI am, exist
οὐNegυἱόςa son, descendenοὗτος
θεόςGod1311×
what comes after →
Article the
δίδωμιI offer, giveπαντοκράτωρruler of the uniπατήρfather, Father,
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theπατήρfather, Father, αὐτός
ἐγώ
καίand, even, also,Article theἐκβάλλωI throw, cast, p
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςΧριστόςanointed, the Me
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theκαίand, even, also,εἰς

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceθεός · 1,311× in the New Testament
Acts Romans Luke 1 Corinthians Revelation John 2 Corinthians Hebrews 1 John Matthew Mark 1 Peter

15 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 1,637 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 7c. AD 40

Τινὲς γὰρ τὸν κόσμον μᾶλλον ἢ τὸν κοσμοποιὸν θαυμάσαντες τὸν μὲν ἀγένητόν τε καὶ ἀίδιον ἀπεφήναντο, τοῦ δὲ θεοῦ πολλὴν ἀπραξίαν ἀνάγνως κατεψεύσαντο, δέον ἔμπαλιν τοῦ μὲν τὰς δυνάμεις ὡς ποιητοῦ καὶ πατρὸς καταπλαγῆναι, τὸν δὲ μὴ πλέον ἀποσεμνῦναι…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὡς πύργος, ὃν οἱ παῖδες αὐτοῦ ἐφ' ὕβρει τοῦ θεοῦ ᾠκοδόμησαν, καὶ ὡς τὰς φωνὰς αὐτῶν μετέβαλε καὶ ὁ τόπος, ἐν ᾧ τοῦτο γέγονε, Βαβυλὼν ἐκλήθη.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 2nd c. AD 7th c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Grenf. 2 33Pathyris101 BC

αὐτῷ μέρος ἧς ἐμισθώσατο σὺν Πακοίβι Σχώτου καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων , τεσσάρων εἰς

P.Adl. 20Poinkoris (Diopolites)99 BC

1 βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ καὶ Ἀλεξάνδρου θεοῦ Φιλομήτορος καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεᾶς Φιλαδέλφου ἔτους ἑκκαιδεκάτου ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ

Chrest.Wilck. 12Pathyris89 BC

ἡμῖν Φιλόξενος ὁ ἀδελφὸς διʼ ὧν κεκόμικεν ἡμῖν Ὄρσης γραμμάτων περὶ τοῦ τὸν μέγιστον Θεὸν Σωτῆρα βασιλέα ἐπιβεβληκέναι εἰς Μέμφιν, Ἱέρακα δὲ προκεχειρίσθαι μετὰ δυνάμεων μυρίων ἐπὶ καταστολὴν τῆς

how much more the blood <the> of Christ, who through [the] Spirit eternal Himself offered unblemished <the> to God, will purify the conscience of us from dead works in order <the> to serve God [the] living?
ζῶντι;¶zaō [the] living? G2198 Verb · present · active · participle · dative · singular · masculine
140× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Hebrews than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To live means to have life, either physically or spiritually, as seen in Acts 20:12 and Romans 7:1-3. It can also refer to being alive with Christ, like in Philippians 1:21.
Amplified meaning
eternally existing
Tyndale gloss
to live
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ζάω (transliterated as zao) means 'to live' and is used in various contexts, including both literal and figurative senses. It encompasses the idea of being alive, functioning in life, and can refer to both animals and plants. In the New Testament, it appears in discussions of spiritual life and vitality, often in relation to Christ and God, highlighting a deeper, metaphorical meaning of existence.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ζάω, -ῶ,

[in LXX chiefly for חיה (most freq. ptcp., ζῶν, inf., ζῆν, for חַי);]

prop., to live, be alive (v. Syn., s.v. βίος; in cl. usually of animal life, but sometimes of plants, as Arist., Eth. N, i, 7, 12): Ac 20:12, Ro 7:1-3, I Co 7:39, Re 19:20, al.; ἐν αὐτῷ ζῶμεν, Ac 17:28; ἐμοὶ τὸ ζῆν Χριστός, Phl 1:21; διὰ παντὸς τοῦ ζῆν (M, Pr., 215, 249), He 2:15; ὃ δὲ νῦν ζῶ ἐν σαρκί, Ga 2:20; ζῇ ἐν ἐμοὶ Χριστός, Ga 2:20; (ὁ) ζῶν, of God (אֵל חַי…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ζάω (zaō) — to live.

ζῶ

(contraction from ζώω: ζάω only in Grammars, [Refs 4th c.AD+]; imperative ζῆ [Refs 5th c.BC+] see at {ζῆ}; optative ζῴη; infinitive ζῆν: imperfect ἔζων [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἔζην in most codices of [Refs 4th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural ἔζων [Refs 5th c.BC+]: future ζήσω [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist 1 ἔζησα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect ἔζηκα [Refs 4th c.BC+]aorist and perfect are mostly supplied from βιόω.- Exc. participle ζῶντος, [Refs 8th c.BC+] always uses the Epic dialect Ionic dialect Lyric poetry present ζώω (also in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; subjunctive ζώῃ [Refs 5th c.BC+], contraction ζῷ [Refs]; Cretan dialect δώω [Refs]; infinitive ζωέμεναι, -έμεν, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: imperfect ἔζωον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect ζώεσκον [Refs 8th c.BC+]aorist 1 ἔζωσα (ἐπ-) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; infinitive ζῶσαι [Refs]: perfect participle ἐζωκότα [Refs]; infinitive ζόειν [Refs 7th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ζάω

zao

a primary verb; to live (literally or figuratively):--life(-time),

(a-)live(-ly), quick.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ζάω

v.

I live

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ζάω zaō 140x

to live, to be possessed of vitality, to exercise the functions of life, Mt. 27:63; Acts 17:28; τὸ ζῆν, life, Heb. 2:15; to have means of subsistence, 1 Cor. 9:14; to live, to pass existence in a specific manner, Lk. 2:36; 15:13; to be instinct with life and vigor; hence, ζῶν, living, an epithet of God, in a sense peculiar to Himself; ἐλπὶς ζῶσα, a living hope vigor and constancy, 1 Pet. 1:3; ὕδωρ ζῶν, living water in respect of a full and unfailing flow, Jn. 4:10, 11; to be alive with cheered and…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ζάω to live, Hom., etc.; ἐλέγχιστε ζωόντων vilest of living men, Od.; ζώειν καὶ ὁρᾶν φάος ἠελίοιο Il.; ῥεῖα ζώοντες living at ease, of the gods, id. Il.; ζῶν κατακαυθῆναι to be burnt alive, Hdt.:—also, ζῆν ἀπό τινος to live off or on a thing, Theogn., Hdt., etc.:— τὸ ζῆν ῀ ζωή, Aesch., etc.: —in a quasi-trans. sense, ἐκ τῶν ἄλλων ὧν ἔζης ( = ἃ ἐν τῶι βίωι ἔπραττες) from the other acts of your life, Dem.

metaph. to be in full life and strength, to be fresh, be strong, ἄτης θύελλαι ζῶσι Aesch.; ἀεὶ ζῆι ταῦτα [νόμιμα] Soph.; ζῶσα φλόξ living fire, Eur.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAP-DSM — Verb · present · active · participle · dative · singular · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAP-DSM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
42%living
living42% · 60×live10% · 14×will live8% · 11×we live4% · 5×lives4% · 5×alive3% · 4×we may live3% · 4×he lives2% · 3×other renderings26% · 37×

143 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb73%adverbial11%predicate6%object5%second object3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 140 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἐγώθεόςGod, a godπᾶςall, the whole,
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςνεκρόςdead, a corpseσῴζωI save, heal
θεόςGod, a god
ἐπίυἱόςa son, descendenπνεῦμαwind, breath, sp
αὐτός
οὐσίαproperty, wealthγάρforλέγωI say, speak
ἀλλάbut, except
νεκρόςdead, a corpseἀσθένειαwant of strengthαὐτός
ζάω[the] living?140×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
νεκρόςdead, a corpseπιστεύωI believe, have θεάομαιI see, behold, c
Article the
ἄνθρωποςa man, one of thἀνήρa male human beiπεριλείπομαιI leave behind
εἰς
Article theθάνατοςdeath
ἐν
αὐτόςσάρξflesh, bodyκόσμοςthe world, unive
διά
Article theἐγώἀνάστασιςa rising again,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceζάω · 140× in the New Testament
Romans John Revelation Acts Hebrews 2 Corinthians Galatians Luke 1 Peter Matthew 1 Thessalonians 1 Corinthians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament20 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 250 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 77c. AD 40

λέγουσιν οὖν οἱ τοῖς νόμοις ἐπὶ πλέον ἐμβαθύναντες καὶ τὰ κατ’ αὐτοὺς ὡς ἔνι μάλιστα μετὰ πάσης ἐξετάσεως ἀκριβοῦντες, ὅτι τῆς αὑτοῦ συγγενείας μεταδοὺς ὁ θεὸς ἀνθρώπῳ τῆς λογικῆς, ἥτις ἀρίστη δωρεῶν ἦν, οὐδὲ τῶν ἄλλων ἐφθόνησεν, ἀλλ’ ὡς οἰκειοτάτῳ…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.66c. AD 75–95

ἔτι δὲ ζῶντος Ἀδάμου Κάιος τοὺς ἐγγόνους πονηροτάτους συνέβη γενέσθαι κατὰ διαδοχὴν καὶ μίμησιν ἄλλον ἄλλου χείρονα τελευτῶντα·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 6.3c. AD 100

Καὶ ὃς ἐλπίσει ἐπ’ αὐτὸν ζήσεται εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 2nd c. BC 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Lond. 2 p. 163-165 no. 354Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites8 BC–5 BC

Κόρδῳ τῶι ἐπιστατήσαντι τῶν φυλακιτῶν … … τας φάσκοντες τὸν πατέρα αὐτῶν ἐκ τοῦ ζῆν μεθεστακέναι πρὸς … λο … κατὰ φυλακὴν. καταστάντες δὲ καὶ ἀπολογησάμενοι ἐφάνημεν τῶι Κόρδωι

P.Mich. 5 228Areos Kome (Arsinoites)AD 47

ὥστε παρʼ αὐτῇ ἐκτέτρωται τὸ βρέφος νεκρὸν ὥστε αὐτὴν κατακλινῆ εἶναι καὶ κινδυνεύειν τοῦ ζῆν. διὸ ἀξιῶ γράψαι τοῖς τῆς Ὠξυρύνχων πρεσβυτέροις ἐκπέμψαι τὸν ἐνκαλούμενον ἐπὶ σὲ πρὸς τὴν

P.Lond. 3 p. 131 no. 846Soknopaiu Nesos (ArsinoitesAD 140

μου τὸ ὄνομα εἰς πρεσβυτερείαν τῆς κώμης ἀπόρου μου ὄντος καὶ μισθοῦ πορίζοντος τὸ ζῆν ἀπὸ τῆς γερδιακῆς διὸ ἀξιῶ σε τὸν κύριον βοηθῆσαί μοι, ἵνα τύχω τῆς ἀπὸ

Sources on this page. Lexicons and dictionaries imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones, Robinson and Packard, Webster and Cawdrey. Thayer’s Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament (Harper, 1889 — Grimm’s Wilke’s Clavis Novi Testamenti, translated, revised and enlarged by Joseph Henry Thayer) is public domain and is set here from the Internet Archive page scan greekenglishlex00grim; it is uncorrected OCR, marked as such on the entry itself, and the Strong’s numbers — which Thayer’s own edition does not carry — were matched by lemma against the other modules on this page. Trench’s Synonyms of the New Testament (Macmillan, 1880) and Moulton and Milligan’s Vocabulary of the Greek Testament (Hodder & Stoughton, 1930, which entered the United States public domain on 1 January 2026) are set from Internet Archive page scans synonymsofnewtes00treniala and vocabularyofgree00mouluoft, and are likewise uncorrected OCR matched to Strong’s numbers by lemma. Trench treats a group of words at once, so the same essay stands on the page of each word it compares. The Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary is © 1993 and is used here by permission for non-commercial use, www.teknia.com/greek-dictionary. The full Liddell-Scott-Jones and the Hebrew word data (TAHOT) come from STEPBible.org, CC BY 4.0. Brown-Driver-Briggs is the OpenScriptures digitisation, public domain. Syntax analysis is the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (biblicalhumanities.org); the concordance and morphology are built from the tagged Nestle 1904 text. Septuagint occurrences use the Open Scriptures Septuagint lemma index, derived from CCAT (University of Pennsylvania) and the Rahlfs 1935 dataset by Eliran Wong, CC BY-NC-SA 4.0 — used here on a non-commercial ministry site. Greek of Josephus and Barnabas from the Perseus Digital Library, CC BY-SA 4.0. Commentaries and the Ante-Nicene Fathers are public-domain texts hosted on this site. Everyday Greek from the Duke Databank of Documentary Papyri, CC BY 3.0, with dates and provenance from the Heidelberger Gesamtverzeichnis. Philo and the Apostolic Fathers from Open Greek and Latin (First1KGreek), CC BY-SA 4.0. The apparatus and the fifth Greek column are the SBL Greek New Testament, © 2010 SBL and Logos Bible Software, CC BY 4.0. The Latin is the Clementine Vulgate (public domain); the Syriac New Testament is the ETCBC edition (MIT licence). The Hebrew behind the Greek is computed here from the Septuagint index and TAHOT, not taken from any aligned edition. The translation spread and the per-word edition marks come from the Translators Amalgamated Greek NT (STEPBible, CC BY 4.0); clause roles from the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (CC BY-SA 4.0); place identifications and their confidence from OpenBible.info Bible Geocoding (CC BY 4.0), with map tiles © OpenStreetMap contributors. Gospel parallels are computed here from shared uncommon vocabulary, not taken from any printed harmony. Cross references are the Treasury of Scripture Knowledge and the subject headings are Nave’s Topical Bible, both public domain. Works under Creative Commons licences are used unchanged apart from markup removal.

Everything we make is available for free because of a generous community of supporters.

Donate